Thursday, May 29, 2008

Wovon man nicht sprechen kann, daruber muß man schweigen. ...


Connected with the XIIth. Conference of the International Association of Buddhist Studies, held at Lausanne, August 23-28, 1999, a registered letter, dated February 1, 1999, addressed to Prof. Christian Lindtner read:

“Dr. Lindtner, Taking into account serious problems and reservations connected with your planned participation in the forthcoming congress of the International Association of Buddhist Studies (Aug. 23-28, 1999, Lausanne), the Congress Organizing Committee, with the support of the Board of the International Association of Buddhist Studies, has decided that your presence at the congress is unacceptable. Please note that you will not be allowed to register for this congress or participate in it in any way.”

The letter was signed by Tom J.F. Tillemans, President of the Congress Organizing Committee, and Vice-dean of the Faculty of Letters, and by Oskar v. Hinüber, General Secretary of the International Association of Buddhist Studies.

I have no idea what this letter had in mind as the proposed grounds for rejecting Lindtner's participation, but the few excerpts I have posted below cannot have helped matters any.

I have, so to speak, nothing much to say about this. Only to say that it leaves me speechless. Not quite as amusing, I think, as I initially thought I might find it. I keep thinking of the fine edition of Bhavaviveka's verse text that I use, an edition prepared by Lindtner.


I provide, from a report favorable to Lindtner, a rough sketch of what the philologist is upto:

>>Lindtner pointed out how virtually each word and sentence found in the Greek text could be traced back to two independent texts belonging to the same corpus of Buddhist scripture, namely the Mûlasarvâstivinaya. One text provides the legend of Gautama, the eponymous progenitor of Gautama the Buddha. The other text is the Mahâparinirvânasûtra, first edited in Sanskrit, Pâli, Tibetan with a translation from the Chinese, by the late German scholar Ernst Waldschmidt.

It could then be shown how “Matthew” first had cut these two sources to little pieces and then pasted them together anew. In this way he had preserved nearly all the original words but created a new whole, a collage, a mosaic. The result therefore, was purely fictitious. “Matthew” displays a most artificial way of “translating” - a fact that has lead to much confusion. Sometimes he translated the sense of the words or sentences, sometimes he translated the sound of words and sentences, and sometimes he tried to combine the sound and sense of the original Sanskrit in the Greek. Nearly all the motives had been taken over from the two Sanskrit sources - e.g. the crucifixion and the Eucharist - but combined anew.

Lindtner also pointed out how the names of the four evangelists could be traced back to the original Sanskrit. For instance, the evangelist Mark is in Greek called Markos. The Sanskrit word is Kumâras, a name for the Buddha as a child. As can easily be seen, the consonants are the same in both languages, namely m-r-k-s. Each of these four consonants has a given numerical value, in this case 40+100+20+200. The numerical value, of course, remains the same, even if the original order of the individual consonants is changed. This rule is technically known as gematria, and gematria was extremely common in ancient Hebrew writings. Gematria also allows the use of anagramas, of course. And thus it can easily bee seen that San. Kumâras has the same value as Greek Markos, namely 360. Hence it is formally perfectly correct to “translate” Sanskrit Kumâras by Greek Markos. Such examples are extremely numerous, providing us with cumulative evidence to establish the direct historical relationship. For instance, the first disciple of the Buddha is called Putras. In Greek this person becomes the first disciple of “Jesus”, namely Petros. Here, as often, not only are the original consonants retained, but their original order is likewise retained. Nearly all personal names and names of places in the Gospels can be accounted for in this way.<<


What follows are Lindtner's words, adulterated only to the extent of ellipses: and trust me, this is one instance where context elision does not weaken his argument.

>>Here I would like to draw the reader´s attention to some cases of “Sanskritisms”, where old and still unsolved difficulties in the Greek of the Gospels are convincingly solved once it is recognized that they are translated from the Sanskrit.

The main Buddhist source of the NT Gospels is the Mûlasarvâstvâda-vinaya (MSV), a huge collection of texts which also include the celebrated Catusparisatsutra (CPS) and the Mahâparinirvânasûtra (MPS). CPS and MPS were edited in Sanskrit and Tibetan by the German scholar Ernst Waldschmidt, Berlin 1952-1962 & 1950-1951, respectively. The CPS also forms a part of the Samghabhedavastu (SBV), the Sanskrit text of which (from Gilgit) was edited by Raniero Gnoli, Rome 1977-1978. Full references to these and other relevant sources may be found in the indispensable Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Göttingen 1973

...

Matthew 16:17. Again, no satisfactory explanation has been given why Simon Peter is called Bar-Iôna. Now, Simon Petros is, as a rule, no other than Sâri-Putras. Sâri-Putras is often addressed in Buddhist sources (Mahâyâna only?) as a jina-putras, “son of Jina”. Bar-Iôna means son (bar) of Iôna, and so it is easy to see that bar translates putras whereas Iôna imitates the sound of Jina(s). So Bar-Iôna was simply Sâri-Putras. Puns on the name of this important disciple - in both sources - are quite frequent. In Matthew 16:18 Jesus says: sy ei Petros, “You are Peter”. The Gr. sy ei contains a pun on Sâri. The “missing r” can, according to a general rule, be taken from putras. In John 1:47 the noun Israelite, Gr. Israêlitês - the disciple in whom there is no guile - contains another pun on Sâri-putras. The word means “son of Israel”, which means that first the s-r represent the original two consonants of Sâri, whereas putras is represented by its original meaning in Israelite as a whole. By means of a simple pun, Sâri-Putras has become a son of Israel In the Gospels “Israelite” only occurs here. To be sure, the other disciples mentioned by John 1 can all be traced back to the Buddhist sources. As I point out in my forthcoming book, Aniruddhas thus becomes Andreas, Pippalas becomes Philippos, and Nâlandâ becomes Nathanael. The Gospels always try to retain the number and nature of the consonants (guttural, palatal, lingual, dental, labial, semivowel, sibilant) of the names of persons and places in the Sanskrit original. 4.

Matthew 14:34 & 15:39. Jesus, who has just been addressed as “son of God”, Gr. theou huios - which of course is a direct translation of San. deva-putras, as is the hybrid “son of David (Gr. huios Daueid)”- now “ and crossing over came to land Gennesaret”.

Here the Greek kai diaperasantes êlthon epi tên gên (eis) Gennêsaret is a direct rendering of San. (mâgadhakâ manusyâ) nadîm Gangâm uttaranty api pratyuttaranti, MPS 7:5. Some editors of the NT add an eis, “to”, to avoid the difficult reading gên Gennêsaret, “to land G.”. But wrongly so, for Gr. gên Gen- is an attempt to render the Gangâm of the original, retaining all the original consonants (viz. g-n-g-m=n). The San. uttaranty api has been inverted so as to become Gr. kai (=api) diaperasantes (= uttaranti), the sense being thus preserved. The second San. verb, pratyuttaranti, is represented by the five syllables, and consonants, of êlthon epi tên (NB:l counts as r, as often).

For San. mâgadhakâ, meaning “(men) form the land of Magadha” (cf. Tib.: yul ma ga dha´i mi rnams, “men of Magadha land”), we have to consult Matthew 15:39, which says that Jesus went into the boat and came “into the borders of Magadha”, Gr. eis to oria Magadan.

All modern commentators agree that this strange location “Magadan” is quite unknown from other sources. Equally puzzling is the variant given in Mark 8:10: “to the parts Dalmanutha”, Gr. eis ta merê Dalmanoutha. Neither “Magadan” nor “Dalmanu(o)tha” are to be found on the map.

In the light of the original source, MPS 7:5, all the old problems are now finally solved. One only has to look at a map of Buddhist India!

It was originally the Buddha who crossed the Ganges in the land of Magadha. This famous episode is not only known from MPS, but even from Buddhist art. The earliest artistic representation of this episode is already to be found in Sanchi, see Dieter Schlingloff, “Die wunderbare Überquerung der Gangâ”, in N. Balbir & J.K.Bautze (eds.), Festschrift Klaus Bruhn zur Vollendung des 65. Lebensjahres, Reinbek 1994, pp.571-584. To be sure, this proves the chronological priority of the Buddhist source.

MPS 7:5 also provides us with the clue to the mysterious location “Dalmanoutha”. Immediately after the words uttaranty api, the San. says that some of the Magadha people crossed the river (nadî) Gangâ in salmani-phalesu (Tib. sin sal ma la´i span leb, “boards of the salmani tree”), i.e. on rafts. Here there can hardly be any doubt that dalman imitates salman. In all likelihood, the Gr. outha is intended to imitate San. atha, the first word in the following sentence, MPS 7:6.

Speaking of atha, this common word is usually translated by Gr. eutheôs or euthus, in all the four Gospels. This literal translation creates confusion, because the Gr. words means “at once”, “immediately”, whereas San. atha simply means, “(and) then”. By translating Gr. eutheôs or euthus in the sense of San. atha the reader can suddenly make natural sense of virtually all the passages in the Gospels where atha occurs in Greek disguise.

A similar observation applies to Gr. apo tote in Matthew 4:17 and 16:21. Some scholars have suggested that this strange expression “from then on” may mark a turning point in the life of Jesus. The reader familiar with the style of SBV, however, will have no problems in recognizing the Gr. apo tote as an inverted translation of San. tato ´pi, “and then”. As a rule, Gr. tote likewise translates San. tato/tatah/tatas, a synonym of atha.

In other words: To understand the Greek one must know the Sanskrit behind it. This is a general rule that - so I maintain - applies to all the “Sanskritisms” of the four Gospels as a whole.

These are just a few typical examples of how the unknown authors of the Gospels “translated” the Sanskrit into Greek. The puns on the sounds of the original Sanskrit are sufficient to show that there was no “Aramaic” (or any other) intermediate.

The strange way of “translating” may come as a surprise to modern readers. But if things are seen in their proper historical context there is but little cause for surprise. Indian readers familiar with the norms of alamkârasâstra - the sabda- and the arthâlamkâras - will easily recognize the various kinds of puns on the sound and meaning of the original.

Jewish readers familiar with the rules (middoth) that are employed in the exegesis of their sacred scriptures, will have even less cause for surprise. A convenient survey of rabbinic hermenetics is provided by Hermann L. Strack, Introduction to the Talmud and Midrash, New York 1959.

The Gospels, with odd results, have been translated “according to the book”. The main rules (Hebrew middoth) at work when the Sanskrit was translated into Greek, were: 1. Neged, corresponding significant number, as when the seven days of the original become six, six, and about eight. 2. Ma´al, paronomasia, a playing on words which sound alike, San. anuprâsa, alliteration, or yamaka, as in the case of Nâlandâ and Gangâm becoming Nathanael and gên Gên-. 3. Gematria, from Gr. grammateia, computation of the numeric value of letters, and metathesis of the letters, e.g. when putras and Tripusa(s) both become Petros. 4. Notarikon, when a word is broken into two or more, as when ganikâ becomes gynê ekh- or gynê êtis.

Gematria is often seen as a subdivision of Notarikon. 5. Mukdam shehu´meúhar ba-´inyan, when something that precedes is palaced second, hysteron proteron, as when the shelters are mentioned before the a-kâla-megha, though they should have been mentioned after the rainy cloud. These and many other middoth are extremely common in Haggadah litterature, i.e. in Hebrew stories of the Passover.<<

Also, in a review on a book on Jesus and Buddha, Christian Lindtner is upset that the following "philological" facts are not addressed:

>>I. The two founders. Jesus is called Son of God and Son of David etc. In both cases the original Sanskrit is deva-putra, “Son of Deva”, where deva becomes “god” or “David”. In Sanskrit the bodhi-sattva lives in a world of deva-putras, from which he descends. There are many deva-putras, which is also the case in Mt 5:9.

In Luke we find puns on bodhi-sattva, viz. Greek to paidi-on, “young boy”. The bodhi becomes paidi, and the to on translates San. sattva. Such puns, anything but serious, are typical of Buddhist scriptures, and they prove the Buddhist source. Now and then Jesus is identified with John the Baptist. Apparently a strange identification! But not so when we see that ho bap-ti-tês is supposed to contain a pun on bo-dhi-sat-tvas. Here the bo-dhi becomes bap-ti, and the ho and tês “translates” sattvas. The Greek abstract suffix - tês, with ho, replaces the san. -tva(s).

Puns on tathâgata(s) are frequent, e.g. the synonym and homonym kathêgêtês, Mt 23:10; or the katheudete in Lk 22:46; or the tês diathêkês, Mt 26:28. The direct source is MPS 42:10. The New Testament, in other words, is simply Tathâgatasya kâyam. I first pointed this out at the Hesbjerg Seminar on New Testament Revisionism in 2001 (see http://hometown.aol.com/eaglerevisionist).
The Greek ho Khristos is an excellent rendering of San. ksatriyas. The genitive is ksatriyasya, which in Mt 1:1 becomes ´Iêsou Khristou. Excellent!


II. Jesus preaches the Kingdom of God, hê basileia tou theou.

So did the Buddha. There are several Sanskrit originals, one of which is deva-parisad. Here the deva- (= devasya or devânâm) correctly becomes tou theou, and the parisat becomes basileia. The learned Luz claims (p. 47) that basileia translates the Hebrew-Aramaic malkut - and thereby reveals his historical naivite. The truth is that basileia translates parisat and is assimilated to malkut, familiar to the Jews. The plural devânâm becomes ouranôn, in the Kingdom of the Heavens .It has always puzzled theologians why Mark and Luke prefer the phrase hê basileia tou theou as opposed to Matthew, who prefers hê basileia tôn ouranôn (see e.g. Paul Feine, Theologie des neuen Testaments, Berlin 1953, p. 69, with numerous references). The Sanskrit gives the simple answer: two different versions of deva-parisat (devasya or devânâm). The PaRiSaT becomes BaSiLeia Tou (p-r-s-t = b-s-l-t).

The odd ta tou theou in Mt 15:23, translates San. deva-tâ. The -tâ becomes Greek ta, and the deva- is taken as devasya = tou theou.


III. Ethics, love etc. The Buddha did not teach love to the same extent that Jesus did so, it is often claimed.
One thereby overlooks the fact that Buddhists are expected to preach the Dharma sattvasattvahitâya etc.
Then we have the obscure word of Jesus about saying raka and môre, Mt 5:22 (quoted p. 81). One has to consult the source, the section on Pârâjika in the Prâtimoksa, to understand their sense: Behind the Greek eipê môre we find Sanskrit mrsâ-vâda etc. (see e.g. W. Pachow, A Comparative Study of the Prâtimoksa, Delhi 2000, pp. 71-75). The samgha is assimilated to the obscure synedrion, and the bhiksu of the original invariably becomes an adelphos. These are fine examples of what the Chinese called “ concept-matching” (ko-i). The stange Greek expression to de perisson, Mt 5:37, is a direct translation of the Sanskrit tata uttaram (to-de imitates ta-ta). It makes sense in the original (e.g. Georg von Simson (ed.), Prâtimoksasûtra der Sarvâstivâdins, Göttingen 2000, p. 184), but nok in Matthew. In Mt 5:40 the khitôna translates Sanskrit kathina; in 5:41, the one and the two “miles” reflect the tri-yojana of the Sanskrit original (von Simson, pp. 341 and 347 for the ref.), etc.

Interestingly, the Buddhists themselves had no claer idea of the historical background of kathina = khitôna, Latin tunica.


IV. Suffering, crucifixion.
The disciples of Jesus are asked to take their “cross”, Greek stavron - which is absurd. Imagine all his disciples running around as “crucifers”, or clad in crosses! The Buddha expects his disciples to put on vastrâni - which makes sense. So VaSTRaNi translates STaVRoN (v-s-t-r-n = s-t-v-r-n).

The crucifixion of Jesus is totally dependent on Buddhist sources. In the Mûlasarvâstivâdavinaya (ed. Gnoli, Roma 1977, pp. 21-26 ) one can read how the innocent Gautama was crucified on a sûla, and the details about the sculls, etc. are also there. Most of the remaining details about the two robbers, the supernatural phenomena etc. are to be found at the end of the Mahâparinirvânasûtra and the Saddharmapundarîkasûtra. One merely has to compare the Sanskrit and the Greek carefully. A phenomenological comparison based on mere translations is bound to lead to a scientific parinirvâna. There is hardly anything in the gospels that cannot be traced back to these Buddhist sources.


V. Christology. Here the title “Son of Man” is absolutely crucial. The double nature of Jesus - or Jesus and Christ - is as Buddhist as can be. A Tathâgata appears to be mortal, but is in fact immortal. This is the fundamental doctrine of the MPS,SDP etc. - and the fundamental doctrine of the NT.
The secrets of the term “Son of Man” I shall reveal on a later occasion. As a rule, the title that Jesus uses to refer to himself, simply translates the San. Tathâgata, that the Buddha employs in the same manner, i.e. in the third person singular. According to the confused account of the gospels, Jesus was a devaputra born of a parthenos, of wind (ek pneumatos); he was the son of anthrôpos; as a babe he was in a phatne, manger, etc. According to our Buddhist sources, a bodhisattva (to paidi-on)comes from and even travels in a lotus, Sanskrit padma, padmini, pundarîka (playfully as if from pundar- plus i-ka). So a bodhisattva is the son of a pundar-. It is now easy to see that being born from (i.e. the son of) a parthenos is the same as being the son of anthrôpos, for p-r-th-n-s = n-th-r-p-s. The “from” is ek, and means that he is a son. And so it is clear that to be a son of man is the same as being born of a virgin, which again is the same as being born from (ek) or in a pundarîka- (p-n-d-r-k-s, as an adj.). To be born from pneumatos hagiou again leads us back to the lotus. The baby in the phat-ne is the bodhisattva in the pad-me etc. When Jesus travels “in wind”, pneumati (from padmini), the bodhisattva originally travelled through the air in a lotus.

So, not being aware of the Lotus, one cannot understand how Jesus was born.
The gospels surely confirm the lotus origin of the son of man!
The Greek ho huios tou anthrôpou is also an imitation/translation of the seven syllables of the term Saddharmapundarîka, i.e. the Tathâgata as a lotus of the true dharma etc.


VI. Prayer and meditation. This includes the Paternoster, the main sources of which are to be found in the Catusparisatsûtra, and the Mahâparinirvânasûtra. For instance, the mê...eis peirasmon, Mt 6:13, is a direct translation of the a-sam-pramosâya, MPS 10:10, where it makes perfect sense. The a- correctly becomes mê, and the sam-pramosâya correctly becomes eis peirasmon (s-m-p-r-m-s = s-p-r-s-m-n).

VII. The Church. The word ekklêsia only occurs twice in the Gospels. The opinio communis of theologians is (with a few exceptions) that the crucial passage, Mt 16:18, cannot possibly be an authentic word of Jesus.

But the rejection of this passage merely shows the subjectivity of theologians. It is as “authentic” - i.e. Buddhist - as any other passage. A philologist familiar with the Sanskrit text of the SDP can easily point out the original passage (SDP, ed. Kern, p. 69) . The Lord reveals his secret to Sâri-putra(s), and this means that he has now again, for the second time, put in motion this (idam) supreme wheel (cakram) of the Dharma. Likewise, Jesus reveals his secret to Petros (p-t-r-s = p-t-r-s), and thereby he will build his ekklêsian (accusative). So, behind the six syllables of mou tên ekklêsian of Mt 16:18 we find the six syllables of idam dharma-cakram. Note the odd mou, which is explained by the desire to represent the idam of the original.

Sâri-putras, to be sure, is called Jina-putra, which explains the mysterious Bar-Jôna in Mt 16:17. Bar, “son”, translates putras, and Jôna is a homonym of Jina. The Sankrit âyuSMâN, of course. becomes SiMôN (s-m-n = s-m-n). It is, at the same time, a homonym and a synonym. These examples - they could easily be multiplied almost ad infinitum - show how absurd and superficial it is to compare Jesus and Buddha, their life , their teachings, their disciples etc. etc. - without first comparing the original Sanskrit and Greek. (In the beginning was the word, if I may be forgiven for saying so!)<<

Subitist



This article sent to me by Dan McNamara. Blessed be his name, for kindly adding to my growing inability to keep track of footnotes.


Before getting on with the article, however, I thought it worth while to record a few notes on a word which causes general incomprehension to those (a) not with French and (b) those who are not raised on French scholarship on Chinese Buddhism. The offending word is 'subitist', (better than the more than disagreeable 'subitizing').

>>The term Subitism as applied to Buddhism is derived from the French 'illumination subite' (lit. 'sudden illumination'), contrasting with 'illumination graduelle'. It gained currency in this use in English from the work of sinologist Paul Demiéville, whose 1947 work 'Mirror of the Mind' was widely read in the U.S. and inaugurated a series by him on subitism and gradualism[1]<<

From Latin adjective subitus (= sudden); but why we cannot retain "sudden" is beyond me. After all: sudden is from: 1290 (implied in suddenly), perhaps via Anglo-Fr. sodein, from O.Fr. subdain "immediate, sudden," from V.L. *subitanus, variant of L. subitaneus "sudden," from subitus "come or go up stealthily," from sub "up to" + ire "come, go."

To use the French is just to cast the debates in Buddhism along the lines of prominent Church Heresies or something with similar cache value. (There is a thought here, which I should have liked another time to have worked out: but the enthymeme may be sketched out as follows: note how you cannot form a term on the model of quietism with English "sudden", but you can with "subite"). This need not mean that seeing the debate in such terms is automatically suspect--it is just a bad argument to stretch our linguistic resources for such reasons.

An article by historically sensitive Bernard Faure also states:

>>As early as 1923, Paul Pelliot, in a seminal essay modestly entitled "Notes on some artists of the Six Dynasties and the Tang," examined the background of the legend of Bodhidharma. In 1947, Paul Demiéville published "The Mirror of the Mind," in which he compared the use of the mirror metaphor in the Chinese and Western philosophical tradition. This article, which inaugurated a series of studies on "subitism" and "gradualism," has exerted a profound influence on the development of Chan studies in the U. S.

In 1949, Jacques Gernet, stimulated by Hu Shi's works, published a translation of Shenhui's "Dialogues"; then, in a rich article published in 1951, he described the eventful biography of this figure. The following year, Demiéville published his monumental Concile de Lhasa, in which he attempted to unveil the history of the controversy over subitism, which animated the enigmatic Council of Tibet (which some scholars today localize, not in Lhasa, but in the BSam yas Monastery, while others deny that such Council ever took place). This work, divided in two parts (doctrinal and historical), is a precious source of information on early Chan, and in particular on the Northern School, to which the Chinese protagonist in the controversy, Moheyan, was heir. It is regretable that Demiéville did not follow up on his initial project, which was to dedicate a second volume to a study of the Chan doctrine. However, in subsequent years, he continued to give lectures at the Collège de France and to publish articles on this topic. It is curious, however, that while that his influence in France remained small, despite the publication in 1973 of two volumes of his collected essays on Chinese Buddhism and sinology, he was beginning to be read in Japan and in the U. S. Among the repercussions of his work in France, we must nevertheless mention the publication in 1970 of a special issue of Hermes on Chan, a second edition of which, greatly expanded (1985), includes not only translation of basic Chan/Zen texts, but a few important articles on Chinese Chan (by Paul Demiéville, Nicole Vandier-Nicolas, Catherine Despeux) and its influence in Tibet (Guilaine Mala).<<

and

>>Among the important contributions to the American discovery of Chan, let us mention Early Chan in Tibet and China (Lai and Lancaster 1983), and Sudden and Gradual: Approaches to Enlightenment in Chinese Thought (Gregory 1987a). The first work contains, among others, the translation of two important articles by Yanagida, one concerning the Lidai fabao ji and the Chan school in Sichuan, and another on the emergence of the "Recorded Sayings" (yulu) of classical Chan; as well as a survey of the studies on Tibetan manuscripts from Dunhuang by Ueyama Daishun. The second work opens with a translation of essays by Demiéville and R. A. Stein on Chinese and Tibetan "subitism."

The question of the relationship between Chan and Tibetan Buddhism was also the object of a number of studies, for instance Jeffrey Broughton's "Early Ch'an Schools in Tibet." The collection in which this essay appeared, Studies in Ch'an and Hua-yen, edited by Gregory and Gimello, also contained essays by Luis Gómez on the teaching of Moheyan, the Chan master studied by Demiéville in Le concile de Lhasa, and by John McRae on the Niutou (Oxhead) School (Gregory and Gimello 1983).<<

From CHAN/ZEN STUDIES IN ENGLISH: THE STATE OF THE FIELD, by Bernard Faure.

On to the main course.


The Great Perfection and the Chinese Monk: Nyingmapa Defenses of Hashang Mahāyāna
by Sam van Schaik

This is an updated version of the article that originally appeared in Buddhist Studies Review 20.2 (2003): 189-204.[1]
1. Simultaneism, gradualism and polemics

A controversy over two apparently opposed approaches to enlightenment runs throughout the history of Tibetan Buddhist thought. Broadly stated, the first position, “the simultaneous approach” (cig car gyi ‘jug pa) was that the cessation of dualistic conceptualisation in meditation was sufficient cause for enlightenment, without any need for the graduated, and much more lengthy, practices of the six pāramitā. On the other hand, the second position, “the gradual approach” (rim gyis ‘jug pa) was that those practices were indispensable.[2]

The conflict between these two approaches was, according to Tibetan tradition, settled in the eighth century in a formal debate. Whether the debate actually occurred as such has been called into doubt, but there is no question of the importance of the legend of the debate to the Tibetan tradition. According to the Tibetan histories, the debate was arranged in Samyé temple in the late eighth century to determine whether Tibet would accept Indian or Chinese Buddhism as normative.[3] In the stories of the debate, the Indian side was identified with gradualism and the Chinese side with simultaneism, a greatly simplified version of the complexities of early Buddhist influences on Tibet which nonetheless became widely accepted in Tibet. According to tradition, the Indian Buddhist scholar Kamalaśīla, arguing for the gradualist position, opposed an Chinese monk called Hashang Mahāyāna, who was arguing for the simultaneist position. In the Tibetan versions of the story, Hashang was defeated, and his method rejected.[4]

For Tibetan scholars of later generations, Hashang Mahāyāna came to be an emblem for a particular kind of erroneous doctrine, the belief in an simultaneous realisation caused by the mere cessation of concepts (mi rtog pa or mi bsam pa), which became a standard object of rebuttal. Later, Hashang’s defeat was put to polemical use against certain Tibetan practice traditions, in particular the Mahāmudrā (phyag chen) of the bKa’ brgyud school and the Great Perfection (rdzogs chen) of the Nyingma school.[5] The Great Perfection’s teachings on technique free meditation were subject to accusations of being no more than the simultaneous method of Hashang. Nyingma scholars were often forced to defend the validity of the Great Perfection against this accusation in polemical texts. The following passage by Khedrupjé (1385-1438) is a good example of the kind of criticisms levelled against Nyingma practitioners:

Many who hold themselves to be meditators of the Snow mountains [of Tibet] talk, in exalted cryptic terms, of theory free from all affirmation, of meditative realisation free from all mentation, of [philosophical] practice free from all denial and assertion and of a fruit free from all wishes and qualms. And they imagine that understanding is born in the conscious stream when - because in a state where there is no mentation about anything at all there arises something like non-identification of anything at all - one thinks that there exists nothing that is either identical or different. By so doing one has proclaimed great nihilism where there is nothing to be affirmed according to a doctrinal system of one’s own, as well as the thesis of the Hashang in which nothing can be the object of mentation.[6]

In view of this kind of criticism it is perhaps surprising that some Nyingma writers, rather than simply defending themselves against such accusations by distancing their own teachings from those of Hashang Mahāyāna, attempted to make a more balanced judgement of the simultaneist doctrine and sometimes went so far as to express their approval of it. Rather than repeating the standard presentations of Hashang’s beliefs as a misguided straying from the true path, as most were content to do, certain Nyingma scholars continued to engage with the problem of simultaneous versus gradual approaches, and its relationship to their own Great Perfection practices.

This article is an examination of the treatment of Hashang by two eighteenth-century writers. The first is Katog Tsewang Norbu (1698-1755), who deals with the teachings of Hashang Mahāyāna in his history of the Chinese simultaneist school. The second is Jigmé Lingpa (1730-1798), in whose Kun mkhyen zhal lung, a discourse on the “three liberations” of the Great Perfection, there is an annotation defending Hashang. This annotation, along with an even more brief comment by Longchenpa (1308-1363), has been taken by some as evidence of the Nyingma school’s longstanding connection with Chan Buddhism.[7] In fact, these eighteenth-century texts tell us little or nothing about the original connections between the Great Perfection and Chan, but a great deal about Nyingma scholars’ attempts to deal with the perceived connection. As will be seen, these two scholars deal with it in quite different ways, but I will suggest that they share a similar motivation, connected to the political events in central Tibet in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
2. Katog Tsewang Norbu

Katog Tsewang Norbu (1698-1755) was the head of Katog monastery, and ranks as one of the most impressive scholars of eighteenth-century Tibet. His studies took in both the texts of the Nyingma and those of the new schools; he exchanged Nyingma for Kagyü teachings with the Twelfth Karmapa, Jangchub Dorjé (1703-1732),[8] and wrote a history of the transmission of Mahāmudrā. Tsewang Norbu studied and championed the forbidden Jonang doctrines, writing several works on the “empty of other” (gzhan stong) theory and on the Kālacakra tantra, the source of “empty of other” in the tantric corpus. He also wrote some non-religious works on history and geography and travelled widely, making several journeys to Nepal.[9]

In his Sa bon tsam smos pa,[10] a study of the Chinese lineages which begin with Bodhidharma and include Hashang Mahāyāna, Tsewang Norbu makes use of a number of old sources including the then rare ninth-century treatise A Lamp for the Eyes of Contemplation (bSam gtan mig sgron) by Nub Sangyé Yeshé. Tsewang Norbu cites two statements from this treatise. The first is that it is important to write about the simultaneous path because of its similarities with the Great Perfection, which could cause a mistaken identification of the two. The second and more controversial statement is that the path of Hashang Mahāyāna is a pure path.[11] In A Lamp for the Eyes of Contemplation itself, the simultaneous path is ranked above the gradualist path, but below the Vajrayāna and the Great Perfection. This is the model followed by Tsewang Norbu, who stresses that the simultaneous path is based on the sutras, specifically, on the sutras of the third turning of the wheel. He defends this statement against the objection that, according to all of the sutras, enlightenment is achieved only after a number of incalculable aeons, with a quotation from the Chinese translation of the Mahāparinirvāṇa sutra:

If one who is skilled in means applies himself diligently to this sutra, that sage will reach perfect enlightenment, unsurpassable and totally pure, before very long.[12]

Having established the legitimacy of the simultaneous path, Tsewang Norbu is keen to show that it is inferior to the Vajrayāna. He states that when the sutras speak of buddhahood, it is intentional, and goes on to discuss the progress towards the goal according to the Pāramitāyāna (or sūtra path) and Vajrayāna (or mantra path).

Having initially travelled the paths of accumulation and application by the sutra path alone, most enter the mantra path at the stage of attaining the first bhūmi. There are those who do not enter it [then], but after the eighth bhūmi in which one is initiated by the Teachers they will have entered into mindfulness in the manner of the mantra path, that is, under their own power without relying on external conditions. Thus although we teach the importance of entering the mantra path rather than the sutra path, from the level of the eighth bhūmi onwards one is on the path of the initiation into the state of awareness where there is no opportunity to negate or purify. This is the case whichever the original entrance gate, sutra or mantra, but because one need practise for a shorter time with mantra, the time in which the fruit of perfect and totally pure buddhahood is attained is the distinction between sutra and mantra. There is no difference in buddhahood itself, so there is no harm in the indirect teachings.[13]

Tsewang Norbu’s position is that whether one starts on the sutra or mantra path is irrelevant from the point of view of the goal. It is possible to progress through all ten bhūmis on the sutra path, but from the eighth bhūmi onwards the practitioner is in effect on the mantra path. The benefit of entering the mantra path at the first bhūmi is that one will attain the goal more swiftly. Tsewang Norbu apparently ignores certain characteristics of the simultaneist doctrine of Hashang in order to fit it to the model of the standard Pāramitāyāna. In contrast to an orderly progression through the ten bhūmis, Hashang is said to have spoken of direct access to the tenth bhūmi.[14] Tsewang Norbu seems to be aware that this treatment is not altogether adequate: remarking on its brevity, he writes that there is no need to elaborate further merely for the sake of a few doubts.[15]

Tsewang Norbu also touches on the contemporary situation in the following passage:

Even today in China there are Hashangs of the Chan school who teach only in the tsung men style.[16] Here in Tibet too, there are a declining few who assert that one should from the beginning aim for the deep inner meaning, saying: “Listen to the instructions on the mind without distinguishing discipline and wildness.” However they have no more than a partial similarity to eachother.[17]

Tsewang Norbu appears to be pointing to certain contemporary Great Perfection and Mahāmudrā teachers who spurn the gradual path - with the interesting aside that these types are in decline. His main point is that there is no more than a partial similarity between the Chinese and the Tibetan teachers. Tsewang Norbu’s opinion is that the Chinese teachers abandon the stages of hearing and contemplating (thos bsam) and make meditation (bsam gtan) the entire path, while the Great Perfection contains all three stages. As evidence for the presence of gradual stages in the Great Perfection he invokes the scriptural authority of the Union of the Sun and Moon (Nyi zla kha spyor), one of the Seventeen Tantras, in which, he says, seven stages of activity are taught as well as the one essential point which encompasses them.[18]

Finally, Tsewang Norbu also sets down what he sees as the correct use of the terms “simultaneist” and “gradualist”. He argues that, while the Chinese Hashangs distinguish between two types of practitioner, the simultaneist and the gradualist, there is no such distinction found in the Indian teachings which came to Tibet. The only true simultaneists are those Chinese Hashangs and their disciples:

Thus past figures like the great monk Ye shes dbang po-a disciple of the Indian abbot Śāntarakṣita-are known as gradualists because they practised the famous three ways to knowledge.[19] The disciples of the Chinese abbot Mahāyāna are known as simultaneists because they applied themselves to contemplation alone.[20]

Tsewang Norbu believes that to use the terms simultaneist and gradualist within the context of Indo-Tibetan Buddhism is an error. Simultaneism is a Chinese phenomenon, unknown to the mainstream Indo-Tibetan tradition. Thus his position is ultimately an orthodox one, although, like Nub Sangyé Yeshé, he does not reject the simultaneous path of Chan, rather he merely attempts to put it in its proper place.
3. Jigmé Lingpa

Jigmé Lingpa (1730-1729) has an important place in the Nyingma tradition as the redactor of a very popular treasure cycle, the Longchen Nyingtig, as the author of a comprehensive exposition of the Buddhist path as it is known to the Nyingma school, the Treasury of Qualities (Yon tan mdzod), and as the editor of one of the best editions of the collected tantras of the Nyingma school. In most of his endeavours he saw himself as reviving the activities of the great fourteenth-century scholar Longchenpa (1308-1353). The Longchen Nyingtig cycle contains several tantras and sādhanas, which said to derive from the eighth century, as well as numerous commentaries upon these texts, the authorship of which is claimed by Jigmé Lingpa himself. In one of these commentaries, calledThe Oral Teachings of the Omniscient One (Kun mkhyen zhal lung), Jigmé Lingpa attempts a response to the criticism that the Great Perfection is equivalent to the non-conceptualisation taught by Hashang Mahayana.

Jigmé Lingpa’s differentiation of the two approaches is based on the distinction, particular to the Instruction Series (man ngag sde) of the Great Perfection, between sems, the samsaric, conceptual mind (sems), and nirvanic, non-conceptual awareness (rig pa). The meditation practices of the Instruction Series found in the Longchen Nyingtig proceed on the basis of this distinction, which comes from the earliest Instruction Series scriptures, the Seventeen Tantras.[21] Therefore it is not surprising that Jigmé Lingpa insists upon the importance of the distinction. He argues that, if the meditator attempts to stop conceptual activity without distinguishing between mind (sems) and awareness (rig pa), the result is a blank indeterminacy (lung ma bstan). In awareness, he argues, conceptualisation is neutralised in a state that is “like a crystal ball”, a simile which points to clarity and vividness, rather than indeterminacy and blankness.[22]

Jigmé Lingpa’s insistence on this distinction between the the simultaneist doctrine and the Great Perfection makes the note he attaches to the above passage quite surprising. Stepping outside of the standard model of accusation and rebuttal, he goes on to defend Hashang:

You have made the assertion that the view of Hashang[23] was like this, based on refutations such as the similarity of non-mentation to an egg.[24] Yet scriptures such as the Buddhāvataṃsaka were known to Hashang. During the debate, Kamalaśīla asked what was the cause of saṃsāra by the symbolic action of whirling his staff around his head. [Hashang] answered that it was the apprehender and apprehended by the symbolic action of shaking his robe out twice.[25] It is undeniable that such a teacher was of the sharpest faculties. If the non-recollection and non-mentation entail the offense of rejecting the wisdom of differentiating analysis, then the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras of the Conqueror also entail this fault. Therefore, what the view of Hashang actually was can be known by a perfect buddha, and no one else.[26]

In his defence of Hashang, Jigmé Lingpa had a precedent in the works of Longchenpa. In one section of his Heart of the Threefold Bliss (sDe gsum snying po), Longchenpa writes on the subject of the transcendence of the consequences of positive and negative actions in the context of Great Perfection practice. There is a famous statement attributed to Hashang Mahāyāna on this same subject, that virtue and sin are like black and white clouds, in that both cover up the sun. Rather than distancing himself from this, Longchenpa uses the same metaphor, and then goes on to say:

When the great master Hashang said this, those of lesser intellects could not comprehend it, but he was in accordance with the [ultimate] truth.[27]

Jigmé Lingpa held Longchenpa in great reverence and was certainly familiar with the Heart of the Threefold Bliss. Longchenpa himself was also following a precendent, set by the twelfth-century Nyingmapa Nyangral Nyima Özer (1124-1192), in his Heart of the Flower: a Dharma History (Chos ‘byung me tog snying po). In this version of the debate between simultaneist and gradualist approaches the Tibetan emperor himself states that there is no ultimate difference between the two paths, but that for those of the best faculties (dbang po, skt. indriya), there is the simultaneous method of Hashang, and for those of medium and below there is the graduated path.[28]

It is interesting to note that, in categorizing Hashang as a particularly astute practitioner of a bygone era, Longchenpa and Jigmé Lingpa are treating him in the same way as they treat the early Indian masters of the Vajrayāna lineages of the Nyingma school. An example of the way these early Indian masters are categorized is found in another of Jigmé Lingpa’s explanatory texts from the Longchen Nyingtig:

Those trainees of the very sharpest faculties like Garab rDorjé, Self-arisen Padmasambhava and Indrabhūti, who were lords of the maṇḍala while seeming to be ordinary students, were spontaneously liberated upon hearing, but gradualist people will not reach the goal in that way. So in this situation there is some further striving for complete liberation.[29]

In this, once again, Jigmé Lingpa is following Longchenpa’s lead, as the following passage by Longchenpa shows:

The great yogis who arrived at that state [of enlightenment], like Padmasambhava, Vimalamitra and Telopa, taught directly, without cause and effect, virtue or sin. Even if we understand this intellectually we have not reached it through becoming truly accustomed to it, so we are taught it after we have distinguished the subtle aspects of cause and effect and are no longer afraid of that state.[30]

Jigmé Lingpa uses the distinctions between the faculties of trainees in his Longchen Nyingtig texts as a way of placing the simultaneous aspects of the Great Perfection beyond the reach of contemporary practitioners. The simultaneous actualisation of the Great Perfection is stated to be possible only for those of the sharpest faculties, and Jigmé Lingpa makes it clear that in his view such types are very rare nowadays, if any exist at all. This qualification would also put the simultaneist path of Hashang, described by Jigmé Lingpa as being for those of the sharpest faculties only, in a purely theoretical role.

Thus Longchenpa and Jigmé Lingpa seem to have been tempted to place Hashang, as an individual, in the same category as the great masters of the Indian lineage who are said to have achieved enlightenment in an immediate fashion. However, the simultaneist approach of Hashang is, by this same move, placed outside the realm of possibility for ordinary practitioners. In this, as we have seen, Jigmé Lingpa is restating themes from Longchenpa’s works. Perhaps Jigmé Lingpa’s really original contribution in the Kun mkhyen zhal lung is his contention that there is a scriptural basis for the simultaneous path as much as for the gradual path in the Prajñāparamitā sutras, an insight which appears to be based on comparative readings of texts, rather than the standardised rubrics of Tibetan scholarship.
4. Comparisons

Jigmé Lingpa and Tsewang Norbu represent two different approaches to the simultaneist teachings of Hashang Mahāyāna. The first approach, represented by Longchenpa and Jigmé Lingpa, treats Hashang Mahāyāna more as an individual than as the representative of a school, and suggests that his realisation might be equal to the realisation of a Great Perfection practitioner. [31] They imply that the simultaneous method followed by Hashang is similar to the approach of the early Great Perfection and Mahāmudrā masters such as Vimalamitra and Telopa. However, this method is said to be beyond the reach of most, if not all, contemporary practitioners.

The second approach, that of Nub Sangyé Yeshé and Tsewang Norbu, is to deal with Hashang Mahāyāna as the representative of a Chinese school of Buddhism which he calls simultaneism (cig char ‘jug pa), tsen min, or the teaching of the Chan masters (bsam gtan gyi mkhan po). This school is accepted to represent a valid method, which is placed in a hierarchy where it has a status higher than the gradual path but lower than the higher tantras of the Vajrayāna and the Great Perfection.

Jigmé Lingpa’s approach is based on what might be called a yogic point of view, wherein the individual paths are seen from the perspective of the goal, ultimate truth, and there is an emphasis on the individual realisation of the exponents of these paths rather than the categorisation of their doctrines. Tsewang Norbu’s approach is primarily doxographic, and the aim is the classic scholarly Tibetan one of ranking different paths into an inclusive hierarchy. The Great Perfection, and other Tibetan teachings, are protected from contamination by more questionable doctrines.

Neither Jigmé Lingpa nor Tsewang Norbu make any attempt to identify Great Perfection with the simultaneous path. In fact both writers are careful to distance the approach of the Great Perfection of their time from the eighth-century simultaneism of Hashang Mahāyāna, and Tsewang Norbu also takes care to make the distinction between the Great Perfection and the Chinese Chan teachings of his own time. For Tsewang Norbu, the Great Perfection is inherently a gradual path, and simultaneism is restricted to the Chinese Chan schools. For Jigmé Lingpa, the Great Perfection can be a simultaneous path, but only for the those of the very sharpest faculties, and he makes it clear that few if any contemporary practitioners fall into this category; thus his position is actually very close to that of Tsewang Norbu.

There remains the question of why these two eighteenth-century Nyingma writers, both aware of the criticisms of the Great Perfection from other schools which had occured through the preceding centuries should open themselves to further criticism by discussing the doctrines of Hashang in any sort of positive light at all. Both Jigmé Lingpa and Tsewang Norbu were writing within a tradition of openess towards these doctrines, supported by the writings of past scholars from their school. While Tsewang Norbu’s interest in early sources brought him to the bSam gtan mig sgron, Jigmé Lingpa’s general enthusiasm for what was unique in the doctrines of the Nyingma brought him to the comments on Hashang Mahāyāna by Longchenpa. Thus both were maintaining what they saw as the particular approach of the Nyingma tradition to this matter.

Such a motivation may be seen as arising from the developments in the seventeenth century, when the monastic presence of the Nyingma school dramatically increased in Tibet, and certain influential figures such as Terdag Lingpa (1646-1714) and Lochen Dharmaśrī (1654-1717) gathered together and standardized a corpus of Nyingma texts. On the other hand, the Nyingma was also subject to considerable persecution at the hands of the Dzungar invaders, who sacked several of the monasteries in Tibet and killed many of the lamas, including Lochen Dharmaśrī (1654-1717).[32] Some kind of persecution continued through to the lifetimes of Jigmé Lingpa and Katog Tsewang Norbu; the latter composed a letter written to the Seventh Dalai Lama, dated at around 1750, which makes a plea for an end to the persecution of the Nyingma.[33] The combination of an increasing confidence and self-consciousness within the Nyingma school, and intermittent persecutions, suggest a climate in which Nyingma writers would be motivated to preserve and support the unique and unusual aspects of their own school.
Bibliography:

Faber, F. 1985.’A Tibetan Dunhuang Treatise on Simultaneous Enlightenment: The dMyigs su myed pa tshul gcig pa’i gzhung‘ in Acta Orientalia 46, pp47-77.

Faber, F. 1986. ‘The Council of Tibet According to the sBa bzhed‘ in Acta Orientalia 47, pp33-61.

Gomez, L.O. 1983. ‘Indian Materials on the Doctrine of Sudden Enlightenment’, in Lai, Whalen and Lancaster, Lewis (eds.). Early Ch’an in China and Tibet. Berkley, California: Berkley Buddhist Studies Series, pp393-434.

Guenther, H.V. 1989. Tibetan Buddhism in a Western Perspective. Emeryville, California: Dharma Publishing.

Houston, G. 1974. ‘The bSam yas Debate: According to the rGyal rabs gsal ba’i me long’, in Central Asiatic Journal 18, pp209-216.

Karmay, S.G. 1988. The Great Perfection (rDzogs Chen). Leiden: E.J. Brill.

Jackson, D.P. 1994. Enlightenment by Single Means. Vienna, Der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften.

Meizezahl, R.O. 985. Die grośe Geschichte des tibetischen Buddhismus nach alter Tradition rÑiṅ ma’i chos ‘byuṅ chen mo. Sankt Augustin: VGH Wissenschaftsverlag.

Seyfort Ruegg, D.S. 1989. Buddha-nature, Mind and the Problem of Gradualism. London: SOAS.

Seyfort Ruegg, D.S. 1992. ‘On the Historiography and Doxography of the ‘Great Debate of bSam yas”, Ihara, Shoren (ed.). 1992. Tibetan Studies: Proceedings of the 5th Seminar of the International Associaton for Tibetan Studies (Narika 1989). Tokyo: Naritisan Shinshoji.

Smith, E.G. 1969. Preface. In The Autobiographical Reminiscences of Ngag-dDang dPal-bZang, Late Abbot of Kah-Thog Monastery [Ngagyur Nyingmay Sungrab series], edited by Sonam T. Kazi. Gangtok.

Stein, R.A. 1987. ‘Sudden Illumination or Simultaneous Comprehension’, in Gregory, Peter N. (ed.). Sudden and Gradual: Approaches to Enlightenment in Chinese Thought. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, pp41-66. [This is a translation by Neil Donner of "Illumination subite ou simultanée, note sur la terminologie chinoise et tibétaine", Annales du Musée Guimet (Revue de l'histoire des religions)CLXXX (1971), pp.3-30]

Tucci, G. 1978. Minor Buddhist Texts (part I & II). Rinsen Book Company.
TIBETAN TEXTS

Ka’ thog rig ‘dzin tshe dbang nor bu
The Collected Works (gSuṅ ‘bum) of Ka˙-thog Rig-’dzin Chen-po Tshe dBaṅ-nor-bu (6 vols.). Dalhousie, H.P, India, 1977.
rGya nag Hashang gi byung tshul grub mtha’i phyogs snga bcas sa bon tsam smos pa (vol.V pp419-450).

Klong chen rab ‘byams pa dri med ‘od zer
mDzod bdun (7 vols). Edited by the Yeshe De Project. India, 1992.
sDe gsum snying po don ‘grel gnas lugs rin po che’i mdzod(vol.VII, pp51-347).

‘Jigs med gling pa
Klong chen snying tig. (3 vols). Edited by Ngawang Sopa. New Delhi, 1973.
rDo rje’i tshig rkang gi don ‘grel kun mkhyen zhal lung(vol.III (huṃ), pp520-546).
rDo rje theg pa smin grol lam gyi rim pa las ‘phros pa’i man ngag gi rgyab brten padma dkar po (vol.III (huṃ), pp463-516);
rDzogs pa chen po klong chen snying tig gi gdod ma’i mgon po’i lam gyi rim pa’i khrid yig ye shes bla ma (vol.III (huṃ), pp293-463)

gNubs sangs rgyas ye shes
rNal ‘byor mig gi bsam gtan or bSam gtan mig sgron. Edited by ‘Khor-gdon gTer-sprul Chi-med-rig-’dzin. Leh, 1974.

Nyang ral Nyi ma ‘Od zer
Chos ‘byung me tog snying po. Facsimile in Meisezahl 1985.

Author Unknown
Rnying ma’i rgyud bcu bdun, A ‘dzom chos sgar redaction (3 vols.). Edited by Sanje Dorje. New Delhi, 1973-1977.
sBa bzhed. Edited by mGon po rgyal mtshan. Beijing: Mi rigs dpe skrung khang, 1982.
Names in phonetic transliteration and Wylie transcription:
Garab Dorjé dGa’ rab rDo rje
Hashang Mahāyāna Hwa shang Ma hā yan
Jangchub Dorjé Byang chub rdo rje
Jigmé Lingpa ‘Jigs med gling pa
Kagyü Bka’ brgyud
Katog Tsewang Norbu Ka’ thog tse dbang nor bu
Khedrupjé Mkhas grub rje
Lochen Dharmaśrī Lo chen Dharmaśrī
Longchenpa Klong chen pa
Nub Sangyé Yeshé gNubs sangs rgyas ye shes
Nyangral Nyima Özer Nyang ral nyi ma ‘od zer
Nyingma Rnying ma
Samye Bsam yas
Terdag Lingpa gTer bdag gLing pa
Footnotes

1] Since the current version of this article has undergone several minor changes, citations should be to Sam van Schaik. 2007. “The Great Perfection and the Chinese Monk: rNyingmapa defences of Hwashang Mahāyāna in the Eighteenth Century”. http://earlytibet.com. I would like to thank Dan Martin for his useful suggestions, which lead to some of these changes.

2] In this context, “simultaneous” indicates that all methods are encompassed by a single method, and all stages of realisation are traversed at once. The secondary signification is a time-based distinction: immediate, sudden accomplishment versus gradual, slow accomplishment. The Chinese words are tun-wu (gradual enlightenment) and chien-wu (simultaneous enlightenment), the respective schools of thought being tun-men and chien-men. These terms and their translation has been discussed in Stein 1987, pp46-51.

3] On the questions regarding the historical occurance of the debate, see Gomez 1983 and Ruegg 1992, which also summarize previous discussions of this topic. Whatever the debate occured as a historical event or not, the stories of the debate had particular symbolic significance for later generations of Tibetans.

4] In this article I use the Tibetan version of the name of this Chinese monk, because we are dealing here with the Tibetan discussion of the Tibetan version of the monk’s teachings. The name in pinyin transcription would be Heshang Moheyan. On the evidence for the actual teachings of Moheyan, which are subtler than the Tibetan tradition ever acknowledged, see Gomez 1983.

5] One early and influential polemical statement is found in the Sa skya Paṇḍita’s (1182-1251) treatise sDom gsum rab byed, which criticised the teaching of a doctrine of simultaneous realisation called “the white panacea” (dkar po cig thub) in Mahāmudrā. There have been several discussion of this subject, of which perhaps the best are Seyfort Ruegg 1989 and Jackson 1994.

6] Translation in Ruegg 1981, p223. The text is the sTong thun skal bzang mig byed, f.152, in volume ka of the gSung ‘bum (Zhol edition). mKhas grub rje’s presentation of the faulty doctrine in terms of view, meditation, activity and fruit identifies it as the Great Perfection, as these are standard definitions of the Great Perfection found in many of the texts of that system. The polemics directed against the Great Perfection are also discussed in Karmay 1988, pp121-133, 178-184, 186-189, 195-197. See also Jackson 1994, p53 n.118, on Rong zom Chos kyi bzang po’s defence of the Great Perfection.

7] The passage by Klong chen pa is in his sDe gsum snying po, a commentary to the gNas lugs rin po che’i mdzod, from the mDzod bdun collection. This passage is used to show rNying ma and Chan affinities in Guenther 1989, pp140-141, n.2 and Karmay 1988, p96.

8] Thinley 1980, p114.

9] Smith 1969, pp8-9.

10] rGya nag hwa shang gi byung tshul grub mtha’i phyogs snga bcas sa bon tsam smos pa: Collected Works, vol.V pp419-450.

11] Sa bon tsam smos pa p434: dgos pa ni rdzogs chen dang cha ‘dra bas mi nor ba’i tshad du yin par gsung ba dang/ Hwashang gi chos de yang yang dag pa’i lam du bzhed pa’o//

12] Sa bon tsam smos pa pp435-436: de bas na shin tu thabs mkhas pas mdo sde ‘di la brtson ‘grus su nan tan byas na skyes bu de ni ring por mi thogs par bla na med pa yang dag par rdzogs pa’i byang chub par ‘gyur ro//

13] Sa bon tsam smos pap.437: thog mar tshogs sbyor gyi lam mdo lam ‘ba’ zhig pas bsgrod nas sa dang po thob pa’i skabs su sngags lam la ‘jug par shas che zhing gal te tshul ston gyi dbang gi sa brgyad pa’i bar du mi ‘jug pa dag yod srid kyang sa brgyad pa nas gzhan rkyen la ltos pa ma yin par sngags kyi ngang tshul rang stobs kyi shes bzhin du ‘jug tu yod pa yin pas des na mdo lam du sngags la ‘jug dgos so zhes la bstan kyang sa bgyad pa yan chad nas ngang gi shes pa’i dbang gi lam la ‘tshang pa dang chad pa’i go skabs med la/ gzhan yang thog ma’i ‘jug sgo mdo sngags gang yin kyang rtung mthar sngags la gzhol dgos pas yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas kyi ‘bras bu thob tshe mdo sngags tha dad kyi sangs rgyas bye du med pa’i phyir de ltar dgongs te gsungs pas skyon med pa’o//

14] sBa bzhed p68 and other sources. See Faber 1986 pp47-48.

15] Sa bon tsam smos pa p437.

16] tsung men is one of the Tibetan transliterations of Chinese chien min.

17] Sa bon tsam smos pa p438: da lta yang rgya nag tu bsam gtan mkhan hva shang tshung men rnams tshul kho na yin ‘dug la/ bod ‘dir yang btsun pa dang khyim pa ris su med par sems khrid nod do zhes thog ma nas zab mo nang don la gzhol bar ‘dod pa phal cher ‘di nyams kyang de dang cha mthun pa las gzhan du ma dmigs so//

18] Sa bon tsam smos pa p438.

19] The three ways to knowledge (shes rab gsum) are the classic trio of listening (thos pa), thinking (bsam pa) and meditating (sgom pa).

20] Sa bon tsam smos pa p439: des na sngon gya gar mkhan po zhi ba ‘cho yi rjes su brangs ba bandhe chen po ye shes dbang po la sogs pas shes rab gsum bsgrags mar mdzad pa la brten rim gyis pa dang rgya nag mkhan po ma ha yā na’i rjes brang rnams kyi bsam gtan kho na la gzhol bas cig char bar grags pa shes par bya’o/

21] Nyingma’i rgyud bcu bdun.

22] Kun mkhyen zhal lung pp527-528.

23] ‘Jigs med Gling pa and Klong chen pa prefer the spelling Ha shang to the more usual Hwa shang.

24] This appears to be a reference to the summary of the refutations of Hwa shang’s position in the sBa bzhed (pp71-72) where it is spoken by Ye shes dbang po.

25] This is a reference to the account of the first meeting of the two opponents before the debate had taken place. It is found in the rGyal rabs gsal ba’i me long (see Sørenson 1994, p401 and Tucci 1978, p365), where the text has Hwa-shang casting his robe to the ground (sa la brdabs) rather than shaking it (sprugs). The story is also found in the sBa bzhed (pp66-67), to which ‘Jigs-med Gling-pa’s account has a greater similarity.

Note however that while this version has Hwa shang throwing his robe to the ground (sa la brdabs), ‘Jigs med gling pa’s has him shaking the folds out of it (sprugs).

26] Kun mkhyen zhal lung pp527-528: khyed cag gi ‘dod pa ha shang la lta ba nor ‘di lta bu zhig yod de snyam pa ci yang mi sems pa sgo nga lta bu’i phyogs snga ji bzhin ‘dir bkod nas brjod kyi gzhan du na sangs rgyas phal po che la sogs pa’i gsung rab mang po ha shang gi blo la bzhugs shing/ kā ma la shi las sgra rtsod dris pa’i tshe phyags shing klad la bskor ba’i brdas ‘khor ba’i rgyu dris pa na/ ber gyi thu ba gnyis sprugs nas gzung ‘dzin gyis lan bya ba’i brda lan ston nus pa sogs dbang po shin tu rnon po’i gang zag yin par bsnyon du med la/ gang dran pa med cing yid la byar med pa la so sor rtog pa’i shes rab spangs pa’i nyes pa ‘jug na skyon ‘di rgyal ba’i yum la’ang ‘jug pas don dam par ha shang gi lta ba yin min rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas kho nas mkhyen gyis gzhan gyis ma yin no/

27] sDe gsum snying po p97: /slob dpon chen po ha shang gis gsungs pas de dus blo dman pa’i blor ma shong yang don la de bzhin du gnas so/

28] Meisezahl 1985, p294, f.435b: de nas btsan po’i zhal nas don la mi thun pa tsam mi ‘dug ste lam spyong lugs la ha shang gi chos cig char du ‘jug mchis pa’o/ dbang po yang rab sbyangs pa can gyis chos yin la/ dbang po ‘bring yan chad chos spyod bcu la skyon bskal/

29] Padma dkar po p478: de yang dbang po rnon mchog gi gdul bya dga’ rab rdo rje dang/ rang byung padma indra bhū ti sogs pa ni dkyil ‘khor gyi bdag po nyid thun mong gdul bya’i snang ngor lam la ‘jug pa’i tshul bstan pa tsam yin phyir rang byung thos grol du gyur kyang/ gang zag rim gyis pa la ni/ de lta’i reg pa mi ‘gro ste/ de’i phyir skabs ‘dir yang grol ba don du gnyer ba zhig yin phyin chad/

30] This passage is cited in ‘Jigs med gling pa’s Ye shes bla ma p332: gshis der phebs pa’i rnal ‘byor pa chen po rnams la rgyu ‘bras dge sdig med pa thod drang du bshad de padma dang/ bi ma la dang/ te lo pa la sogs pa bzhin no/ rang cag rnams la blos de ltar rtogs kyang goms pas thog du ma ‘phebs pas/ gshis la mi skrag cing

I have not been able to locate the passage in Klong-chen-pa’s works.

31] The equivalence between the realisation of Chinese simultaneists and Great Perfection meditators is also asserted in the Blon po bka’ thang, the gter ma of O rgyan Gling pa (1329-1367), which has been translated in Tucci 1978.

32] See Petech 1950 for an account of this period.

33] Ka’ thog Tshewang Norbu, Selected Writings, pp743-758.

And this is a paper worth keeping in mind generally:

THE SUDDEN/GRADUAL POLARITY:

A RECURRENT THEME IN CHINESE THOUGHT

PETER N. GREGORY
JOURNAL OF CHINESE PHILOSOPHY
Vol.9 1982
PP. 471-486
COPYRIGHT @ 1982 BY DIALOGUE PUBLISHING COMPANY, HONOLULU,
HAWAII, U.S.A.


.


P.471


During the weekend of May 22-24, 1981, the Institute for
Transcultural Studies sponsored a conference on "The
Sudden/Gradual Polarity: A Recurrent Theme in Chinese
Thought." Funding for the conference was provided by a grant
from the American Council of Learned Societies. The purpose
of the conference was to explore the various historical and
philosophical issues constellated around the sudden/gradual
polarity in an effort to recast its significance in as broad
an intellectual context as possible. It focused, however, on
the manifestations of this polarity within Chinese Buddhism.
While the controversy surrounding the sudden/gradual
polarity was not without precedent in other Buddhist
traditions, it assumed its greatest significance in the
Chinese Buddhist tradition, where its articulation displayed
a number of characteristically Chinese features linking it to
non-Buddhist modes of thought. The fact that this polarity
assumed particular importance in the Chinese Buddhist
tradition suggests that it resonated with, or gave form to, a
similar pre-existent polarity within Chinese thought. One of
the main objectives of the conference, therefore, was to
explore how this polarity formed part of a larger discourse
in Chinese intellectual history.
The conference thus sought to take an approach different
from those of previous discussions of the significance of the
sudden/gradual controversy in Chinese Buddhism. Instead of
trying to locate the source of the debate within the Indian
Buddhist heritage, the conference attempted to provide a new
perspective on the process of Buddhism's accommodation with
some of the dominant themes in Chinese intellectual history,
as well as Buddhism's effect upon that tradition. While
exploring the fundamental religious and moral issues behind
the sudden/gradual controversy as it was conducted within the
Chinese Buddhist tradition, the conference also investigated
how it could be reformulated as a paradigm by which to
elucidate some of the


P.472


tensions inherent in other traditions of moral and spiritual
cultivation.
In order to achieve as broad an interdisciplinary
approach as possible, the conference assembled thirteen
scholars from a variety of fields, including Indian Buddhism,
Chinese Buddhism, Religious Studies, Chinese Intellectual
History, Neo-Confucian Studies, Chinese Literature, and
Chinese Art History. Following is a brief summary of the
twelve papers presented at the conference.

1. Luis Gomez, University of Michigan, "Purifying Gold: The
Metaphor of Effort and Intuition in Buddhist Thought."

This paper provided a comprehensive historical and
philosophical overview of the sudden/gradual controversy in
Buddhism. As a working hypothesis, the paper began by
characterizing the fundamental philosophical rift at stake in
the controversy as lying between (1) the understanding of
enlightenment as a sudden leap into a state or realm of
experience that is integral, ineffable, and innate and (2)
the understanding of enlightenment as a gradual process of
accumulation (or reduction), as being describable, as having
degrees, and as being susceptible to progressive cultivation.
As a corollary to this, the first position considers the
state of bondage as the result of an error of perception (or
conception), thus comparing enlightenment to the experience
of opening the eyes, while the second position considers the
state of bondage as the result of attachment (or karmic
conditioning), thus comparing enlightenment to the process of
overcoming a bad habit. Whereas the first position represents
the situation seen from the perspective of enlightenment, the
second position represents the point of view of those seeking
enlightenment. Thus, in the context of Indian Buddhism, the
philosophical framework for the sudden/gradual controversy
lay in the doctrine of the two truths.
The first main section of the paper analyzed the two most
famous historical instances of the sudden/gradual
controversy. The first began in China in the fourth decade of
the eighteenth century with Shen-hui's attack on the
"gradualistic" teachings of the Northern Line of Ch'an,
against which he promoted the "sudden teaching" of the
Southern Line. The second took place in Tibet during the last
decade of the eighth century in the debate between the
Chinese subitist Mo-ho-yen and the Indian gradualist
Kamalasila. An examination of the content of these debates
reveals that the putative


P.473


issue-the sudden/gradual controversy-included a whole complex
of issues which can be grouped into various sets of
polarities (e.g., insight vs. concentration, activity vs.
rest, developed vs. innate Buddhahood, the obligatory nature
of moral practices vs. their natural unfolding, etc.). When
the positions of the various figures in the debates are
compared, they line up differently in regard to the various
doctrinal issues involved, the subitist in one context
holding some of the doctrinal positions of the gradualist in
another context. The sudden/gradual controversy thus does not
divide along any single polarity. Nor does there seem to be
any way to predict the specific doctrinal positions of a
proponent of one side or the other in the debates.
Nevertheless, there is considerable overlap in the way
clusters of positions group together in the actual debates.
Sudden and gradual therefore do not form a simple and static
polarity,but represent more,two opposing modes of thought
which can best be translated into the basic, and very
general, dichotomy of intuition and effort.
The second section of the paper explored two of the
polarities at issue in the controversy -those of insight vs.
concentration and activity vs. restexamining the former from
a strictly Buddhist perspective and the latter from a
comparative perspective. The issue of insight vs.
concentration illustrates how the sudden and gradual
positions intertwine. Kamalasila's position on the necessary
cooperation of insight and concentration, for example, is
essentially the same as that advocated by Shen-hui.
Kamalasila's misinterpretation of Mo-ho-yen's position
suggests that he was probably responding more to issues
relevant to his own polemical context than to the actual
position of his opponent. The second polarity discussed in
this section -that of activity vs. rest- raises the question
of quietism, in terms of which the controversy has often been
discussed. Despite the frequent use of this term, it is not
clear to which side in the debate it should be applied. While
the issues raised by the Buddhist debates may call to mind
the controversy over quietism in the Christian tradition, an
examination of the particular historical and theological
contexts in which the debates were conducted in each
religious tradition shows that they were so different as to
render the use of the term "quietism" meaningless when
referring to Buddhism.
The third and final section of the paper pointed out the
danger inherent in assuming that a metaphor common to
different religious traditions


P.474


indicates some kind of relation in the deep structure of
those religions. The mirror, for example, serves as one of
the most frequent metaphors for sudden enlightenment in
Buddhism (although it is also used to illustrate the opposite
position as well). The same metaphor is found in the
Christian tradition in the thought of Gregory of Nyssa, where
it has several points in common with some of the doctrinal
positions usually associated with the subitist position of
Southern Ch'an. Nevertheless, when taken within the total
context of his thought, the metaphor of the mirror turns out
to be based on an entirely different complex of theological
assumptions and expresses a gradualistic vision of the soul's
progress. We must thus be cautious in comparing religious
metaphors cross-culturally and can only do so meaningfully by
remaining sensitive to the particular doctrinal and
historical context in which they are articulated.

2. John McRae, Yale University, "On Shen-hui's Early
Teaching Career."

This paper discussed the historical background and doctrinal
milieu of Shen-hui's early teaching career. Shen-hui was to
gain fame for his attack on the Northern Line of Ch'an for
its allegedly "gradualistic" teachings and his concomitant
championing of the teaching of "sudden enlightenment," which,
in a series of public sermons given in 830, 831, and 832, he
claimed represented the authentic Ch'an transmission handed
down to his teacher, Hui-neng. The paper argued that despite
the image of Shen-hui as a vehement anti-Northern polemicist,
his early teachings were developed within the general
doctrinal framework of Northern Ch'an. The paper went on to
examine three Tun-huang texts associated with the Northern
School which demonstrate the close affinity between, if not
the mutual influence of, Shen-hui's early teachings and those
of Northern Ch'an. The paper concluded with a discussion of
two metaphors -those of the sun underlain by clouds and the
mirror- which can be taken as defining the conceptual
matrices of early Ch'an.

3. Robert Zeuschner, University of Southern
California,"Sudden and Gradual in the Division Between
the Northern and Southern Lines of Ch'an."


P. 475


This paper began by analyzing the Southern Ch'an charge,
first made by Shen-hui, that the Northern teachings were
"gradualistic" and did not even admit the possibility of
sudden enlightenment. It then went on to examine some
relevant passages in the Northern Ch'an texts to ascertain
the validity of Shen-hui's allegations. While Northern Ch'an
literature never explicitly advocates a step-by-step form of
practice gradually leading to enlightenment, it does,
nevertheless, lend itself to such an interpretation. A
further examination of Northern Ch'an writings, however,
reveals that the Northern Line did not -as the author claims
Shen-hui to have charged- reject the possibility of sudden
enlightenment. The Kuan-hsin lun for example, clearly states
that 'enlightenment takes place in a moment." The paper
suggested that, whereas the Southern position can be
characterized as "sudden enlightenment followed by gradual
cultivation," the Nothern position can be characterized as
"gradual cultivation followed by sudden enlightenment." The
paper then argued that part of the confusion that has usually
attended discussions of the sudden/gradual controversy as it
pertains to the split between these two lines of Ch'an has to
do with the fact that key terms such as "enlightenment" were
actually being used in different ways in each tradition. In
order to clarify the debate, the paper proposed a fourfold
scheme of the various stages of practice and enlightenment:
(1) a prepatory stage involving progressive proficiency in
moral and meditative practices, (2) an initial and
transforming experience of insight, (3) a process of further
cultivation wherein one's life is gradually brought into
accord with one's insight, and (4) the ultimate perfection of
Buddhahood which leaves no room for further improvement or
attainment. When the Northern and Southern positions are
analyzed in terms of this scheme, the Northern position will
be seen to place great emphasis on the first stage, virtually
none on the second, and some on the third; the Southern
position, by constrast, minimizes the importance of the first
stage, places greatest emphasis on the second, and gives only
some consideration to the third. Both lines tacitly take the
fourth and final stage for granted.

4. Jeffrey Broughton, California State University, Long
Beach, "The Tibetan Ston-mun: Contant Examination and
Sudden Seeings."


P.476


This paper discussed, and included a translation of a major
portion of, the late Northern Ch'an text Tun-wu chen-tsung
yao-chueh ("Determining the Essentials of the True Teaching
of Sudden Enlightenment"), which exists in a number of
partial Chinese Tun-huang manuscripts as well as one complete
Tibetan translation. This text is of particular interest in
that it reveals the fusion of Northern and Southern motifs
that seems to have been characteristic of late Northern Ch'an
writings. The text also seems to have circulated widely among
the proponents of sudden enlightenment (stonmun) in Tibet in
the later part of the eighth century, and is thus of further
interest in revealing the general doctrinal background out of
which Mo-ho-yen, the principal spokesman for the subitist
position in the Tibetan debates-emerged. The text focuses
upon "examining the mind" (k'an-hsin), a major theme running
through Northern Ch'an meditation texts. The text lacks the
polemical tone of the statements attributed to Mo-ho-yen in
the records of the Tibetan debates and seems to have been
written for followers within the tradition. A comparison of
this text to the position of Mo-hoyen as it was defined in
the course of the debates suggests that the polemical context
of the debates might have forced Mo-ho-yen into taking a more
radical position than that generally found in the teaching
tradition in which he stood.

5. Peter Gregory, Stanford University "Sudden Enlightenment
Followed by Gradual Cultivation: Tsung-mi's Analysis of
Mind."

This paper examined the meaning of sudden enlightenment as it
was understood by Kuei-feng Tsung-mi (780-841), traditionally
reckoned as the fifth patriarch in the Ho-tse lineage of
Southern Ch'an founded by Shen-hui. It began with a
discussion of Tsung-mi's analysis of the various meanings of
"sudden" and "gradual" as they were used in his day by
Buddhists in different traditions. Tsung-mi first
differentiates between the use of these terms as they apply
to classifications of the Buddha's teachings and descriptions
of the course of Buddhist practice. In regard to the latter,
he goes on to enumerate five different ways in which the
terms are used in reference to practice and enlightenment:
(1) gradual cultivation followed by sudden enlightenment (a
position which he identifies as that of Northern Ch'an), (2)
sudden


P. 477


cultivation followed by gradual enlightenment, (3) gradual
cultivation and gradual enlightenment, (4) sudden
enlightenment followed by gradual cultivation, and (5) sudden
enlightenment and sudden cultivation. The remainder of the
paper was devoted to the discussion of the fourth position,
that of sudden enlightenment followed by gradual cultivation,
which Tsung-mi attributed to Shen-hui. Tsung-mi held that
although the experience of enlightenment entailed a sudden
insight into one's true nature, it was still only the first
stage in a ten-staged process culminating in the complete
realization of Buddhahood. Tsung-mi thus contended that
sudden enlightenment did not obviate the necessity of a
gradual process of further spiritual cultivation; rather, it
formed the indispensible ground upon which authentic Buddhist
practice had to be carried out. The paper went on to examine
Tsung-mi's analysis of Mind, which derives from the Awakening
of Faith, as providing the rationale for his theory of sudden
enlightenment followed by gradual cultivation, underlining
the importance of the tathagatagarbha doctrine in furnishing
an explanation of the ontological basis for enlightenment.

6. Neal Donner, Institute for Transcultural Studies,"The
Perfect and the Sudden: Tien-t'ai Light on the Platform
Sutra. "

This paper consisted of three major parts. The first
discussed Chih-i's understanding of the terms "sudden" and
"gradual" in the context of his thought on teaching and
practice. Chih-i's thought is highly complex and dynamic--he
uses various classificatory rubrics in different discussions
of the Buddha's teaching, for example- and defies the kind of
procrustean formulation into which later interpreters
attempted to make it fit (such as Chan-jan's "Five Periods
and Eight Teachings"). In terms of the rubric that Chih-i
uses in his Fu-hua hsuan-i ("The Profound Meaning of the
Lotus Sutra "), his primary work on doctrine, "sudden" refers
to the Avatamsaka, because in that sutra the Buddha directly
expounded the context of his enlightenment without making any
concessions to the limited capacity of his audience to
understand. "Gradual" refers to all other sutras expounded by
the Buddha, who, conscious of his disciples' limitations,
used a variety of expedients to communicate his message. In
terms of meditation, "sudden" (or "sudden-perfect" as it is
more often referred to in this context) designates that type
of


P.478


practice outlined in the Mo-ho chih-kuan ("Great Calming and
Contemplation"), Chih-i's magnumopus on Buddhist practice, in
which ultimate reality is taken as the object of meditation
from the very beginning. "Gradual" designates that type of
practice in which ultimate reality is approached through a
series of proximate meditational objects.
The second part of this paper discussed the attitude
toward meditation found in the Platform Sutra, making the
controversial argument that its teaching of sudden
enlightenment, and its concomitant repudiation of the
necessity of meditation practice, should be seen as
reflecting its proselytizing effort to make enlightenment
accessible to the mass of lay Buddhists. The third part of
the paper discussed a number of striking similarities between
the practices, ideas, and terms found in the Platform Sutra
and those found in Chih-i's opera, suggesting the likelihood
of T'ien-t'ai influence, if not directly upon the sutra
itself, then at least upon the formative tradition out of
which it developed.

7. Robert Gimello: University of Arizona,'The Sudden and
the Gradual in Early Hua-yen: A Study in the Emergence
of a T'ang Religious Discourse."

The paper presented at the conference was only the
prolegomena to a more extensive study that would discuss the
establishment in early Hua-yen thought of the p'an-chiao
distinction between "the sudden teaching" and "the gradual
teaching," and treat the relation between it and other early
Hua-yen notions regarding the duration of the course to
enlightenment, against the background, and as an example, of
the dominant styles of religious and secular discourse taking
shape in the early T'ang. This effort would not only involve
tracing the sudden/gradual distinction and its attendent
doctrines back into the early history of Chinese Buddhism,
but would also involve tracing the "lateral" or synchronic
connections between these explicitly religious concepts and
certain ideas or modes of discourse seen in contemporary
literature, non-Buddhist thought, and political culture. The
actual conference paper set forth a series of philosophical
reflections which sought to develop a theoretical framework
for applying structuralist methods of analysis to such a
discussion. The paper went on to discuss the earliest
manifestation of the sudden/gradual controversy in China,
docu-


P.479


mented in Hsieh Ling-yun's Pien-tsung lun, as revealing the
particularly Chinese Problematik out of which the terms were
to come into general currency in the Chinese Buddhist world.
It then discussed the emergence of the sudden/gradual
distinction in the various doctrinal classification schemes
employed by Chih-yen, the figure responsible for the
systematic formulation of early Hua-yen doctrine.

8. Miriam Levering, Oberlin College, "The Sudden/Gradual
Polarity as Reflected in Sung Intellectual Discourse: The
Case of Ta-hui Tsung- kao (1089-1163)."

This paper discussed the critical role that doubt played in
the writings of the Sung dynasty Ch'an Master Ta-hui, and the
innovative revaluation that he gave to it in his practical
methods of Ch'an instruction. In the recorded sayings of
earlier Ch'an figures such as Lin-chi, doubt was seen
primarily as an obstacle to the realization of one's own
inherently enlightened nature. Ta-hui also regarded doubt as
a hindrance to enlightenment, casting it as the very
expression of the unenlightened mind. Enlightenment
accordingly consists in the elimination of the basis of
doubt. Ta-hui's originality lay in his use of doubt as a
means to the realization of enlightenment by emphasizing the
importance of hua-t'ou as a device for focusing all of one's
doubts into one Great Doubt. The more intense one's doubt,
the deeper one's eventual enlightenment. The paper went on to
venture that Ta-hui's emphasis on the role of doubt as a
vehicle for precipitating an experience of enlightenment
might be depicted as a subitist move to counter some of the
more "gradualistic" forms of Ch'an practice--such as "silent
illumination Ch'an"- prevalent in his day. As the title
suggests, the paper presented at the conference was but a
preliminary draft of a larger project discussing Ta-hui's
thought in the context of Sung intellectual discourse.

9. Rodney Taylor, University of Colorado, Boulder,
"Sudden/Gradual: A Persistent Paradigm Within
Neo-Confucian Self-Cultivation."

This paper examined the role of quiet-sitting (ching-tso)
within the regimen of Neo-Confucian self-cultivation.
Buddhist terminology has often been used to characterize the
different attitudes toward self-cultivation in the Ch'eng-Chu


P.480


and Lu-Wang traditions: while the former's emphasis on effort
can be likened to gradual cultivation, the latter's emphasis
on intuition can be likened to sudden enlightenment.
Moreover, since the practice of quiet-sitting is frequently
cited as a prime example of Buddhist influence on
Neo-Confucianism, a discussion of the different attitudes
toward this practice within the Neo-Confucian tradition
naturally gives rise to questions of the nature and degree of
Buddhist influence on Neo-Confucianism. The paper explored
such questions by examining the development of the practice
of quiet-sitting. It began with a discussion of the two Sung
dynasty figures primarily responsible for its incorporation
into Neo-Confucianism, Lo Tsung-yen and Li T'ung. It went on
to discuss Wang Yang-ming's reaction against the practice in
his effort to redefine the investigation of things (ko-wu).
The paper then discussed the two Tung-lin scholars Ku
Hsien-ch'eng and Kao P'an-lung who, in response to the
excesses of some of Wang Yang-ming's more radical followers,
reinstituted the practice as a major component of
Neo-Confucian self-cultivation. As Kao P'an-lung's writings
on quiet-sitting furnish one of the most extensive and
articulate discussions of the practice available, they are
discussed in more detail. In conclusion, the paper took up
some of the questions raised at the beginning, discussing the
relative applicability of a number of theoretical models for
characterizing the influence of Buddhism on Neo-Confucianism
(historical interrelationship, eclecticism, syncretism, and
synthesis).

10. James Cahill, University of California, Berkeley,"Tung
Ch'i-ch'ang's 'Southern and Northern Schools' in the
History and Theory of Painting: A Reconsideraion."

Tung Ch'i-ch'ang's theory of the Southern and Northern
Schools of painters was one of the most influential
formulations in traditional Chinese art criticism. The paper
discussed it in relation to the sudden/gradual
polarity,arguing that the sectarian division of Ch'an into a
southern and northern lineage furnished Tung with an
analogical, rather than a substantive,model for classifying
painters into broad, stylistic groupings. Tung identified the
painters of colored landscapes with the Northern School and
painters of ink monochrome using graded washes with the
Southern School. Tung's scheme generally followed earlier
formulations in contrasting Sung dynasty profes-


P.481


sionals working in detailed, decorative, academic styles with
Yuan dynasty amateurs working in free, spontaneous styles.
However, since its adoption of "Southern" and "Northern" as
categories for classifying painters was not bound by any
rigid, objectifiable criteria (such as Sung vs. Yuan or
professional vs. amateur) , but was based on a wholly
subjective evaluation of style, it avoided the kind of
objections that could inevitably be raised against earlier
schemes whose classification of painters was always somewhat
arbitrary and forced. Since rational reasons could not be
used to justify stylistic preferences, an appeal to lineage,
or to orthodoxy, provided Tung with the only available form
of justification for his theory. Tung's formulation, then,
did not imply a Ch'an aesthetic, or that there was a Ch'an
content to landscape painting. Rather,it functioned in much
the same way as Yen Yu's use of the Ch'an analogy in his
theory of poetry. Ultimately, the intellectual context for
understanding Tung's theory has more to do with NeoConfucian
ideas than with Ch'an.

11. Richard Lynn, University of British Columbia,"The Sudden
and the Gradual as Concepts in Chinese Poetry Criticism:
An Examination of the Ch'an-Poetry Analogy."

This paper examined the use of the Ch'an-poetry analogy first
given definitive expression in the Sung dynasty by Yen Y ü
in his Tsang-lang shih-hua. The paper argued that the use of
terms such as "sudden" and "gradual" as critical categories
in Chinese poetics is best understood analogically- that is,
the student of poetry somehow acquires poetic genius "just
like" the student of Ch'an achieves enlightenment. The paper
explored the nature of this analogy, traced its origins, and
followed its various ramifications in Sung and post-Sung
critical texts. It showed that some critics were as much
influenced by Neo-Confucian interests in self-cultivation as
by elements borrowed from Ch'an. In some cases it is possible
to discern a three-way analogy between Ch'an,
Neo-Confucianism, and poetry. The situation became more
complicated in mid-Ming times with the emergence of Wang
Yang-ming's School of Mind and its committment to
individualistic forms of the search for selfrealization, for,
from then on, theorists of poetry often allied themselves
with either a "gradualist" approach to genius analogous to
Ch'eng-Chu orthodox methods of self-realization or a "sudden"
approach analogous to the


P.482


heterodox (and even iconoclastic) methods advocated by Wang
Yang-ming and his later school.

12. Francis Cook, University of California,
Riverside,"Sudden Enlightenment in Dogen's Zen."

This paper confuted the common misconception that Dogen's
form of Zen teaching is gradualistic. It argued,instead, that
Dogen, faithful to the Chinese Ch'an tradition to which he
was heir, maintained that the experience of enlightenment was
sudden. His teaching concerning the nature and attainment of
enlightenment is based on his understanding of Buddha-nature
and is given its most explicit formulation in the principle
of the oneness of practice and enlightenment (shusho itto).
While Dogen's position had its antecedents in the Platform
Sutra and other Chinese sources, it also exhibited features
that are novel and unique. His understanding of enlightenment
thus derived from his own religious experience as well as the
Zen tradition in which he stood. Moreover, one of the primary
issues in the various historical manifestations of the
sudden/gradual controversy had to do with the necessity of
moral and intellectual preparation for the attainment of
enlightenment. Dogen's teachings that practice and
enlightenment are identical and that moral cultivation is the
organic unfolding of practice-enlightenment can therefore be
seen as representing both a continuation and radicalization
of continental ideas of sudden enlightenment.
In his closing remarks Professor Wei-ming Tu currently at
Harvard University discussed a number of the issues raised at
the conference. Among these, he pointed out that the
discussion of the sudden/gradual polarity raises the problem
of how enlightenment should be understood by scholars of the
various Chinese religious traditions. As useful and necessary
as historical and cultural analyses are to such an
understanding, the problem cannot be explained away by
reducing it to a parochial concern of a particular culture at
a particular point in history. He argued that, unless an
attempt is made to understand the larger, and far more
difficult, problem of the meaning of enlightenment as a
religious experience, it will be impossible to understand the
religious issues at stake in the sudden/gradual controversy.
Professor Tu suggested that scholars need to take the truth
claims of the religious traditions seriously and should adopt
what anthropologists call an "emic"


P.483


approach. Nevertheless, while scholars should be empathetic
towards these traditions, they should, at the same time, also
approach them with critical self-awareness.

* * * * *

The papers presented at the conference, and the discussion
that they precipitated, revealed the complexity of the
sudden/gradual Problematik. As it was manifested in Buddhism,
the sudden/gradual rubric was seen to contain a host of
epistemological, ontological, and ethical issues, such as the
nature of delusion (is it fundamentally an error in
perception or is it rooted in the whole personality
structure?), the nature of enlightenment (Does it admit of
degrees or is it indivisible? Can it be approached through a
series of progressive approximations or is it given
all-at-once in its entirety?), the nature of ethical and
religious action (Is it something that must be consciously
cultivated as a necessary precondition for enlightenment or
is it rather the spontaneous and natural outflowing of the
experience of enlightenment itself and therefore something to
which no special attention need be directed at all?), the
nature of religious language (Is ultimate reality ineffable
or can
something meaningful in fact be said about it?).
A particularly interesting and significant conclusion
reached by the conference -and demonstrated most notably by
Luis Gomez' paper- was that, in the specific historical
instances of the sudden/gradual controversy, there was no
necessary or even predictable way in which the positions
taken by the actual participants could be correlated with the
complex of issues contained within the sudden/gradual rubric.
In fact, it was seen that the subitist on one occasion might
very well hold a number of doctrinal positions maintained by
the gradualist on another. The complexity of the doctrinal
issues involved suggested that "sudden" and "gradual" did not
represent clearly defined doctrinal positions so much as they
did a general stance towards religious cultivation that could
best be characterized in terms of the relative emphasis given
to effort and intuition.
Despite the vague sense of the polarity, several attempts
were made to define it more precisely. It was generally
agreed that, within the Buddhist context, the basic
philosophical framework for the sudden/gradual polarity was
provided by the doctrine of the two truths. Accordingly, the
subitist


P.484


position could be generally characterized as one in which
enlightenment was regarded from the absolute perspective of
the goal, i.e., as talking about the issue from the point of
view of ultimate truth, whereas the gradualist position could
be generally characterized as one in which enlightenment was
regarded from the relative perspective of the means by which
the goal was attained, i.e., as talking about the issue from
the point of view of conventional truth. As a corollary to
this characterization, the subitist position would tend to
emphasize apophasis; the gradualist, kataphasis.
Another very suggestive attempt was made by Robert
Gimello, who defined the issue in the following terms: "Is
ultimate reality so distant from and yet so continuous with
the mundane that one can have only a mediated and step by
step access to it? Or is it so proximate, and yet so
autonomous and so utterly unlike our illusions or
expectations of it, that one can reach it only all-at-once
and only without any mediation whatsoever?" While this was
one of the more interesting and viable definitions of the
polarity put forth at the conference, it also served to
underline the complexity of the issue. That is, the subitist
position is often identified with a radical assertion of
nondualism. Yet, if we define the two positions in terms of
continuity and discontinuity, then, on an empirical level at
least, the subitist position is seen to presuppose a
fundamental dualism, as any sudden leap into enlightenment
can only be possible if there is a radical cleavage between
the unenlightened and enlightened states.
The conference also did much to clarify the discussion of
sudden and gradual enlightenment by analyzing how the terms
were used in different contexts. A point that was made in
several of the papers was that the terms "sudden" and
"gradual" contained a wide spectrum of meanings and were, in
fact, used in quite different ways. This meant that the
various participants in the debates were often employing the
same terms to argue about different things. Within the
context of Chinese Buddhism, the terms had a specific range
of meanings as they were used by the scholastic tradition to
classify types of doctrines taught in different Buddhist
texts. They also had another, although partially overlapping,
range of meanings as they were used by the Ch'an schools to
characterize different approaches to Buddhist practice. To
make matters even more confusing, the term "enlightenment"
was also used to cover a variety of different meanings. It
could refer to the fundamental ontological ground that made
religious practice possible, an initial


P.485


experience of insight, or the culmination of religious
practice. Thus, in the debates whether enlightenment was
sudden or gradual, the participants were often talking at
cross purposes.
Although it was not addressed explicitly, the general
working assumption around which the conference was organized
proved to have provided a fruitful approach to what has often
been treated as a purely Buddhological problem. The papers
and discussion gave support to the idea that the importance
of the sudden/gradual controversy in Chinese Buddhism could
be understood, in part, by seeing it as elaborating a tension
already present in Chinese thought (such as that between what
Richard Mather, in an article on the Chinese intellectual
world in the third century, has characterized as naturalness
and conformity). Because this tension was given one of its
most articulate expressions in the Buddhist debates of the
eighth century, we are justified in using the Buddhist terms
"sudden" and "gradual" to characterize this polarity without
thereby implying that it was a specifically Buddhist
paradigm, or that its use in later non-Buddhist contexts
necessarily reflected a Buddhist influence. In fact, it seems
to have been due to their very vagueness and generality that
the terms could be adopted by Yen Yu and Tung Ch'i-ch'ang as
categories in their theories of Chinese poetry and painting,
as Richard Lynn and James Cahill ably demonstrated, without
necessarily suggesting any explicitly Buddhist content.
When considered in terms of the very broad polarity of
intuition vs. effort, the sudden/gradual rubric has a wide
applicability which can be seen as operating at different
levels of generality throughout the course of Chinese
intellectual history. On the most general level, the polarity
can be seen as reflected in the tension between the early
Confucian and Taoist traditions. Moreover, within the
Confucian tradition itself, it can be seen as reflected in
the different points of emphasis between Mencius and
Hsun-tzu, or between the Ch'eng-Chu and Lu-wang schools of
Neo-Confucianism. Even within the latter, it can further be
seen as operative in the different interpretation of Wang
Yang-ming's Four Sentence Teaching given by his disciples
Ch'ien Te-hung and Wang Chi.


P.486


* * * * * *

As was originally intended, papers presented at the
conference are being revised for publication in a volume to
be edited by Robert Gimello and Peter Gregory, the conference
directors. This volume will constitute the second in a series
on East Asian Buddhism to be published jointly by the
Institute for Transcultural Studies and the University Press
of Hawaii. The first volume in the series, Studies in Ch'an
and Hua-yen Buddhism, also edited by Gimello and Gregory,
grew out of a conference held at the Institute for
Transcultural Studies in May, 1980 and is scheduled for
publication in the autumn, 1982. Another volume, dealing with
the significance of the Japanese Zen Master Dogen and to be
edited by William LaFleur of the University of California at
Los Angeles, is being planned as the third in the series.



(Here is some more, from SAM VAN SCHAIK, at "earlytibet.com" in his blog "Tibetan Chan II):

Great work on piecing together the Dunhuang fragments of Moheyan’s writings has been done by Luis Gomez, and I will look at just one of these manuscripts here, IOL Tib J 468. I want to ask if we can establish whether Moheyan really taught a kind of ‘blank’ meditation, or something a little less extreme. Let’s see.

In his description of meditation, Moheyan writes this:

When you are engaged in contemplation itself, look at your own mind. Then, the lack of any mental activity at all is non-thought. If there is movement of the conceptual mind, be aware of it. “How should one be aware?” Do not analyse the mind which is moving in terms of any kind of quality at all: do not analyse it as moving or not moving; do not analyse it as existing or not exising; do not analyse it as virtuous or non-virtuous; and do not analyse it as defiled or pure. If you are aware of mind in this way, it is natureless. This is the practice of the dharma path.

Well, there is certainly mention here of “the lack of any mental activity.” But the rest of the passage concerns what to do when there is mental “movement”. Interestingly, Moheyan does not suggest suppressing this movement. What he says is: be aware of it without analysing it. What kind of awareness is he talking about? The Tibetan word is tshor, which is used here as a translation for the Chinese character jue 覺 meaning ‘awakening’, ‘illumination’ or ‘awareness’. These words seem a long way from the blankness that Moheyan is supposed to have experienced in his meditation practice. Indeed it seems that he is telling his students here not to suppress mental movement, but to leave it to move in the context of an awareness that does not distinguish it into dualistic extremes.

References
1. Demieville, Paul. 1952. Le Concile de Lhasa. Paris: Imprimeries Nationale de France.
2. Gomez, Luis. 1983. “The Direct and Gradual Approaches of Zen Master Mahāyāna: Fragments of the Teachings of Moheyan,” in Studies in Ch’an and Hua-yen, edited by Gimello and Gregory: 393–434.
3. Schrempf, Mona. 2006. “Hwa shang at the Border: Transformations of History and Reconstructions of Identity in Modern A mdo.” JIATS 2: 1-32

Tibetan text
IOL Tib J 468: (1v) //bsam gtan nyId du ‘jug pa’I tshe/ bdag gI sems la bltas na/ cI yang sems dpa’ myed de myI bsam mo/ rtog pa’I sems g.yos na tshor bar bya/ cI ltar tshor bar bya zhe na/ gang g.yos pa’I sems de nyId/ g.yos pa dang ma g.yos par yang myI brtag/ yod pa dang myed par yang (2r) myI brtag/ dge ba dang myI dge bar yang myI brtag/ nyong mongs pa dang rnam par byang bar yang myI brtag/ ste// chos thams cad cI lta bur yang myI brtag go// sems g.yos pa de lta bur tshor na rang bzhin myed pa yIn te/ /de nI chos lam spyod pa zhes bya’//

Sunday, May 18, 2008

O Ye Glorious Orientaliste




Sir Marc Aurel Stein (Hungarian: Stein Aurél) (26 November 1862 – 26 October 1943) Hungarian archaeologist. Stein purportedly inspired by Sven Hedin's 1898 work, Through Asia; a man whose work I continue to enjoy, not least on account of his notes on the Rajatarangani by Kalhana, notes which combine the man's varied talents: cartography, numismatics, classics, medieval Kashmiri, not to speak of Sanskrit. The translation is none too shabby either.

Let's face it: were I have as qualified, I would be proud to call myself an Orientalist just to join his club.

And this does not hurt:
‘How Grateful I must feel to the kindly fate which allowed me to do so much of my work in Kashmir for the last 55 years.’’- Sir Aurel Stein
En route to Kishenganga, Kashmir, 1942



Here are some fun tidbits:

Stein's Kashmir Diary: Excerpts
Still Kashmir, Vangath. Last night at Peer Bakhsh's suggestions the tribal people who in the summer months pasture their flocks in the high valleys gave me a real serenade. Some of the Kashmirian songs were very melodic and reminded me of Hungarian songs.
- August 25, 1891.

On the Dudh Kuth Pass. Twelve thousand feet high. Cooler than Srinagar. I am taking advantages of the opportunity to learn Kashmiri and regularly take lessons both on the march and at camp from Pandit Kashi Ram. Though not a scholar like Govind Koul, he is more reasonable and a fine person.
- August 15, 1894.

In the night ride across the Wular lake a small storm made me worry for the safety of my Rajatarangini manuscript. It seemed as if the Goddess of Wisdom Sharda represented by the waters of Kashmir, was unwilling to let me abduct the manuscript. This is what happened 1200 years ago to Chinese pilgrim Hiuen Tsang who had to leave his Sanskrit manuscripts in the angry Indus river.
- October 17, 1894.



The detailed account of these travels find mention in Ancient Geography of Kashmir, published in 1899 by Asiatic Society of Bengal. The accounts of few adventures and some aesthetic sojourns of these peregrinations indicate the inner orientation of Stein’s mind.

August 13, 1888. “Right after our departure at 6 A.M., we climbed a steep mountain with large glittering snowfields below the highest peak. As we moved along the ridge, the wind which in the morning blows up the valley and in the afternoon down the valley drove patches of heavy fog towards the peak. They soon overtook us and shrouded everything. Towards the east, Alatopa valley along with everything else was hung with clouds; while to the left of the ridge we could look to the Chand valley and hear the roaring of the Hillen brook some 2000 feet below. Luckily the fog around the ridge was not too dense. Otherwise it would have been difficult to keep the narrow trail. I estimated the altitude by points given on my map: 11500 feet. The flowers still grow abundantly. The scent from the masses of mint was almost overpowering. There are only gnarled trees and dwarf firs and a low creeping bush. Pir Baksh the guide, Piru for short, is an interesting companion who as a hunter in the retinue of officers has seen large parts of the alpine world. He has been in Astor, a garrison town in the Northern Kashmir and Ladakh where the valleys are over 10000 feet high. He knows Gujrat and has admired the railroad there. But by and large he has remained a simple hunter. He knows the valleys and the mountains around Barrangalla like the inside of his pocket and points out many places where years ago he spent with his sahibs months in tents surrounded by ice and snow. Hunting is only possible here in spring and winter.
“Piru and others can only imagine Europeans as English officers. Indeed they are the only ones who visit Kashmir; the country is so difficult to access that civil servants limited in their furloughs prefer Simla or Murree. All military matters are well known to these people - the first question addressed to me by my bearers, by the buffalo hunters we meet usually concern the length of my furlough or whether I am a Captain or Lieutenant sahib. All distances deceive in the fog and thus the march that brought me to this quiet place at 1.30 P.M. seemed doubly long. The area is covered, by short scanty- grass. There is penetrating cold. My tent, which I took the precaution to surround with the stone wall, is very comfortable. I hear the gay chatter of the bearers sitting around the camp fire. Nothing reminds me of the fact that I am living in the clouds, tired and full of expectation for tomorrow’s march. I turn in early”.

August 16, 1892. “The path into the valley of Mandi seems to be very old. In several places where it leads over steep rocks overhanging a wild mountain stream, steps are cut into the rock. Now I understand why all conquerors from Mahmud of Ghazni (971-1030) the most successful of Turkish chieftains who from Afghanistan raided deep into India to the Sikh, Ranjit Singh (1780-1839) the great Sikh leader, the Lion of Punjab, who tried to penetrate into Kashmir over the Toshamaidan Pass were brought to stand still before the fortress of Lohara. The pious legend of Loharin people attributes the Maharaja’s defeat to the miraculous intervention of the saint Sayyad Canan who lies buried near the village of Tantrvand at the Loharin proper. Mysterious noises and alarms proceeding from his Ziarat are said to have thrown the Sikh army into confusion and to have brought about its precipitous flight.
“In reality Ranjit Singh’s retreat was due to for more natural causes. His troops had already suffered great losses by sickness and desertion on the advance to the Toshamaidan plateau. When the latter was reached by his advanced guard, the Sikhs found themselves without supplies and confronted by strongly posted force under Azim Khan, the Afghan Governor of Kashmir. After few days spent in inaction, Ranjit Singh received the news of defeat which his general, Ram Dayal sent with second column by Pir Pantsal Pass, had suffered before Shupiyan. Ranjit Singh then felt obliged to order a retreat. This developed into a complete rout when the hill men of Raja of Prunts attacked the Sikhs from the mountains about Loharin. On July 30, 1814, Ranjit Singh himself had to flee to Mandi after the complete loss of his baggage and great portion of his army”.




And this is just good clean fun:


Islam Akhoon - the Master Forgerer
- P. N. Kachru
Once Islam Akhoon, always Islam Akhoon -- Aurel Stein
He befooled world scholars, orientalists and authorities. But Aurel Stein found him out, made him confess and got him convicted publicly in Khotan, his home town. He was Islam Akhoon, a master forgerer of manuscripts, the like of whom world had never known before.

Islam Akhoon was one of the informers through whom the well known scholar Dr.Hornle of Asiatic Society of Bengal, had.got fifteen sites around Khotan in Central Asia marked for explorations of ancient manuscripts. Soon he became master of the scandalous game which trapped not only Hornle but many others in its net. Akhoon's "collections" during the period 1895 to 1898, and his supposed forays in Taklamakan later, came to be scandalously exposed. This enterprising native treasure -hunter enmeshed a network of international agencies in his so-called discovery of old Brahmi manuscripts, his "discoveries" finding their way into the collections in London, Paris and St. Petersburg where scholars continued for long scratching their heads over what they called the "unknown characters."

One orientalist, Backhund, however, started suspecting the genuineness of the Akhoon manuscripts from the beginning. In course of his inquiries from local sources, he had already gathered the information that Akhoon and his agents were using wooden blocks procured from a local cloth-print maker for their forgeries. After purchasing three supposedly old manuscripts from Akhoon, Backhund made local investigation and came to know through his servant how these "manuscripts" were being made. Backhund's critical inspection of the manuscripts drew his attention to several points which gave rise to suspicion in his mind. For instance, the manuscripts, acquired by him from Akhoon, "had a certain crispness or freshness and bore none of the signs of wear and tear normally associated with everyday use". Further, Backhund observed, the paper of the manuscripts was "exactly of the same kind as prepared in Khotan in the present day," and "though very ill-treated (burnt and smoky) is still strong, almost as if it were new." Backlund further observed that the corners of the manuscripts "were quite square (not round as usually they are in old books) and the edges recently cut, though in such a manner as to make them look old". But, inspite of these observations by Backlund, Dr. Hoernle stuck to his opinion about the genuineness of the manuscripts. It was in the late summer of 1900 that Sir Aurel Stein, after leaving the house of his host Macartney who was the representative of the British government in Kashgar, went to Khotan. This was the place from where Islam Akhoon was supposed to make his forays into the desert, and was supposed to have supplied his manuscript finds to the collection of British and St. Petersburg museums. One of the purposes of Stein's visit was to find out the truth about Akhoon's treasure hunting forays, he had told Hornle.

Perhaps suspecting Stein's intelligent move Islam Akhoon did not venture to see him personally, but managed to offer an old manuscript to him that had passed through ; his hands. Subjecting the manuscript to "water test", the mere touch of wet fingers was enough to wipe away the so-called 'unknown characters.' Peter Hopkirk the famous travel-writer of Central Asia writes that "to Stein's highly trained eye, it (the manuscript) looked suspiciously like certain of the books in Hoernle's collection in Calcutta."

Before leaving for London along with his treasure caravan, Stein was determined to unravel the truth behind Islam Akhoon's adventures of manuscript trade. Stein had collected sufficient evidence to expose Akhoon as a liar. Through his own explorations also he did not find any trace of the writings with Islam Akhoon's "unknown characters". Stein was determined to confront this forgerer who had managed to dupe learned scholars of entire Europe and England by engaging their attention. He put the responsibility of bringing the forgerer to book before he could manage to escape, on the Chief Mandarin (bureaucrat) of Khotan. It was on 25th April 1901 that the local Amkan's party caught Islam Akhoon in his home along with "a motley collection of papers" and produced him before Sir Aurel Stein. These were quite familiar to Stein as similar block-printed papers could be found in Calcutta also. But even two days' protracted probing could not bring Akhoon to accept the forgeries done by him. Pleading to the contrary he said that he had simply procured the manuscripts from persons "since dead or absconding". Commenting on this, Stein himself relates: "It was a cleverly devised line of defence, and Islam Akhoon clung to it with great consistency and with the wariness of a man who has had unpleasant experience of the ways of the law." In fact he already had to suffer at the hands of the law a couple of times before. According to Hopkirk, Islam Akhoon had been previously punished "for posing once as Macartney's agent and blackmailing villagers. Akhoon had been flogged and imprisoned.

Again, for forging another Sahib's handwriting to obtain money he had been forced to wear the huge and dreaded Chinese punishment collar of heavy wood, designed to prevent a prisoner from feeding himself. "Akhoon repeatedly denied of ever having visited the sites of origin of the manuscripts supplied to Macartney; insisting that he had procured them through his agents. Stein thought further investigations under the Chinese law would lead to the barbaric torture, which Stein, with his human nature, would never have liked. So, to debunk Akhoon's pronouncements Stein restored to Dr.Hornle's report itself. Finally Akhoon's defence crumbled and gave way on production of a copy of Dr. Hornle's report in which Akhoon's statements given to Macartney had verbatim details and graphic descriptions of his personal visits to the sites of the origin of the manuscripts.

Akhoon's first line of retreat was to admit having seen the old books being manufactured; but finally he admitted, that "he hit upon the idea of writing his own ancient manuscripts." For a long time Islam Akhoon and his close partner Ibrahim Mullah were producing, from their small factory, a steady supply of forged manuscripts. Their best customers were the two rivals, Macartney, the British representative, and Petrovsky, the Russian Counsel, both of whom were eager buyers. Akhoon admitted before Sir Aurel Stein that his first forged manuscripts were produced and sold in 1895. Initially, he imitated the cursive Brahmi characters, and these productions successfully found their way into the leading museum collections of Europe. "Thus Akhoon's factory gained confidence and prosperity", writes Stein, "in sand--buried Ruins of Khotan." As Islam Akhoon quickly perceived, that his "books" were readily paid for, though none of the Europeans who bought them could read their characters or distinguish them from ancient scripts, it became unnecessary to trouble about imitating the characters of genuine fragments.

While there was a constantly rising demand for such manuscripts, Islam Akhoon could not keep the pace with it. He decided to engage the block-makers to produce blocks for quick impressions to meet the demand and make a fortune as quickly as possible. The first consignment of these block-printed manuscripts was successfully produced and sold in 1895. Forty-five of these were fully described, and illustrated by Dr. Hoernle in his scholarly report of 1899.

Once the defence of Islam Akhoon collapsed, he told Stein everything he (Stein) wanted to know about the operations of the strange little factory that duped and deceived Hoernle and other scholars. The paper they used, Akhoon told Stein, was bought locally in Khotan. Then this was yellowed or stained light brown with Toghurga, a dye obtained from a local tree. After adding the writing by hand or by block-printing, the pages were hung over a fire so as to receive by smoke a proper hue of antiquity. Finally, before being taken to Kashgar and offered to their unsuspecting purchasers, the forgeries were thoroughly besmeared with the fine sand of the desert as they would have been had they come from a sand-buried site. "I well remember" Stein recounts, "how in the spring of 1898 I had to apply a cloth brush before I could examine one of these forged 'block priests' that had reached a collector in Kashmir."

With all this happening, Stein felt to blame squarely and every bit those who had unwittingly encouraged Akhoon and his gang by slapping up their forgeries so eagerly and so indiscriminately. Stein clearly indicted his friend Macartney and the Russian Petrovsky, but also reflected gravely on the valuable time wasted by Dr. Hoernle and other scholars on these worthless works.

Back in Kashgar, he again joined the Macartneys, but kept his feelings to himself. After two weeks of stay, he left for London, along with twelve crates of treasures, on May 29, 1901. In England, his task was almost delicate -- to go to Oxford to meet Dr. Hoernle and break to him the embarrassing news that he had been made a fool of by a semi-literate villager named Islam Akhoon. Stein feared that the shock could be too devastating for Hornle after having professed and publicised too much on these forgeries. But to Stein's great relief Hornle survived the shock. Reports Stein about the meeting: "He is deeply disappointed by Islam Akhoon's forgeries, but to my satisfaction he has recovered". Thus the responsibility to declare that all the "block prints" and the manuscripts in "unknown characters" procured from Khotan since 1895 were in fact modern fabrications of Islam Akhoon and his team. To save themselves from embarassment, the leading oriental scholars who had been enthusiastic about these "treasures" were anxious to shelve the affair and clear hastily the traces of these "old books" from the British Museum when Islam Akhoon, the treasure seeker from Khotan confessed to forging them.

Yet these extraordinary forgeries found their place in the British Museum where they were in two wooden chests labelled "Central Asian Forgeries". Islam Akhoon, the Devil, too, has got his share. The wily forgerer, who completely outwitted giants in the field of scholarship, is described as something of a genius. He too has his modest memorial -- that small corner of the British Library's oriental department near the Tun-Huang manuscripts where his once venerated "old books" are preserved for posterity.

Camped on Mohand Marg. I enjoy the freedom and work eleven hours a day. After dinner I along with Govind Koul take down Kashmiri tales from the mouth of the peasant bard Hatim, the storyteller and am thus collecting valuable material which I will put to good use in Europe.
- June 19, 1896.

Jammu: I visited again after 50 years the Raghunath temple library. Its six thousand old Sanskrit manuscripts had been catalogued by me with the help of Pandit Govind Koul and another excellent scholar friend Sahaz Bhat in what seems now like a previous birth. It had been a dreary task but it saved the collection from being lost. I had a very attentive reception, had to talk Sanskrit again for an hour or so thus purifying my tongue by use of the sacred languages after all my peregrinations in the barbarian North and West. It was a quaint experience to find myself in the end garlanded in the traditional Kashmir Hindu fashion for the first time in life.
- December 12, 1940.

Along the Kishan Ganga river: Towards the end of 12 marches I was glad to find myself back in Kashmir after all the barrenness past, the kingdom looked more verdant and fertile than ever. How grateful I must feel to the kind fate which allowed me to do so much of my work in Kashmir for the last 55 years.
- September, 1943.

Friday, May 16, 2008

So You Thought You Liked Chocolate









I used to joke as a child that my father did not need to sight see, as cigarette packs carried with them images of famous monuments. Such as the Charminar. Now, no need to travel to far-flung Kajuraho and crane your neck to sight a wee tiny bit of impropriety (and this much fun can't but be improper, nor all that wee come to think of it) on the edges of pillars. BonBon Chicago, for those that would like to order them. I have no idea how much time it takes to craft these delectable masterpieces; consider it: finally a possible argument for chocolate actually being inappropriate for kiddies!

Tuesday, May 13, 2008

Finally, an Amazonian Argument


(Courtesy Ananya)

"Amid this edenic simplicity, two things appalled the European scientist, the Miranya ate human flesh, and they were active slave raiders. When Martius interrogated a Miranya chief about his eating human meat the Indian gave a reasoned answer:

"whites do not like to eat crocodiles or monkeys even though they are tasty. But if they had fewer turtles and pigs they certainly would eat them-for hunger hurts. All this is merely a question of habit. When I kill an enemy, it is better to eat him than to let him rot: for big game is rare, since it does not lay eggs as turtles do. Death itself is worse than being eaten. If I am killed, it would be of no concern to me, whether or not [my enemies] the Omagua ate me. In fact, I know no game that tastes better [human flesh]-although you whites are too sour."

Despite the good taste of human meat, the Miranya chief said that he would always prefer to sell a captive to the whites than eat him, "for Cachaca rum tastes even better than blood."

(From John Hemming, Amazon Frontier, 212, 3rd full paragraph).


Ananya Chakravarti (note the 'v') is a student of history, increasingly bemoaning the lack of cannibalism amidst Brahmins in Goa.

alchemy

1362, from O.Fr. alkemie, from M.L. alkimia, from Arabic al-kimiya, from Gk. khemeioa (found c.300 C.E. in a decree of Diocletian against "the old writings of the Egyptians"), all meaning "alchemy." Perhaps from an old name for Egypt (Khemia, lit. "land of black earth," found in Plutarch), or from Gk. khymatos "that which is poured out," from khein "to pour," related to khymos "juice, sap." The word seems to have elements of both origins.

"Mahn ... concludes, after an elaborate investigation, that Gr. khymeia was probably the original, being first applied to pharmaceutical chemistry, which was chiefly concerned with juices or infusions of plants; that the pursuits of the Alexandrian alchemists were a subsequent development of chemical study, and that the notoriety of these may have caused the name of the art to be popularly associated with the ancient name of Egypt." [OED]

The al- is the Arabic definite article, "the." The art and the name adopted by the Arabs from Alexandrians and thence returned to Europe via Spain.

on the other hand, there is this:

"Alchemy, Chinese versus Greek, an etymological approach: a rejoinder," by Mahdihassan S, who says:

"The theory generally accepted maintains that Alchemy arose at Alexandria as a child of Greek culture. It has two names, Chemeia as the earlier and Chumeia as the later. There is another theory that Alchemy arose in China. Its founder was the aged ascetic who longed after drugs of longevity. He first tried jade, next gold and cinnabar, but the ideal was a drug which was red like cinnabar and fire-proof like gold. But what was actually prepared was red colloidal gold or "calcined gold," by grinding gold granules in a decoction of an herb of longevity. It was called Chin-I; Chin = gold and I = plant juice. In Fukin dialect Chin-I = Kim-Iya. This was Arabicized, by pre-Islamic Arabs trading in silk with China, as Kimiya, whence arose Al-Kimiya and finally Al-chemy. It was first accepted by Bucharic speaking Copts in Egypt who transliterated Kimiya = Chemeia, pronouncing it as the Arabs did. With the increase of trade in silk the Chinese also went to Alexandria and helped the Greeks to translate Chin-I as Chrusozomion meaning, gold (making) ferment, instead of gold making plant juice. Consistent with this origin of the word Chemeia is the fact that the earlier Alchemists were not Greeks but probably Bucharic speaks Copts or Egyptians. The consumer of Chin-I or Chemeia became "a drug-made immortal" called Chin-Jen, Golden-Man. This was translated into Greek as Chrusanthropos. Thus the etymoloogy of two Greek words Chrusozomion and Chrusanthropos support the origin of the loan word, Chemeia as Chinese. To save space it is not proposed to discuss the origin of Chumeia."

WTF??? American Journal of Chinese Medicine for you, 1988.

Someone has to tell me whether it is true that David White has managed to etymologize the word to suggest India as the origin.

Yogavasistha notes (contd)


# Emboxed stories such as those in the Yoga Vasistha are an Indian speciality; see for example the famous "Ocean of the Streams of Story" collection, the subject of a recent translation by Arshia Sattar in a Penguin Classics paperback, Tales from the Kathasaritsagara. These stories found their way to Europe and into the story works of authors such as Boccaccio and Chaucer.

# Stories specifically of the Yogavasistha type have had a direct influence on some modern European writers, most notably Hermann Hesse, author of Siddhartha. The clearest example is the final story ("The Indian Life") at the end of his novel Magister Ludi, also translated as The Glass Bead Game; this tale is very much like the story of Gadhi and similar stories in the Yogavasistha.

Yogavāsiṣṭha: See also Vasiṣṭha–Ramāyaṇa.
Yogavāsiṣṭha, Comparative study of, and Buddhism. (H). * Acharya, Nandini *** Raipur, 1983, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭha, Elements of poetry in, * Dubey, Sacchidananda *** Jabalpur, 1983, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭha men mānasatattva. (H). * Kumar, Varinder *** Punjab (Hspr.), 1995, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭha: Nature of Liberation and its means. (H). * Dube, Sachidananad *** Jabalpur, 1983, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭha-Rāmāyaṇa, Elements of poetry in, * Vani, M.B. *** Bombay, 1973, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭhasya dārśanika-gaveṣaṇam. (S). * Devi, Rama *** Andhra, (In progress).
Yogavāsiṣṭhasya samālocanātmakam adhyayanam. (S). * Joshi, K.C. *** Kumaun, 1992, Ph.D.
Yogavāsiṣṭ¬ha-viśeṣasandarbhe bhāratīya-darśane mokṣa- svarŪpāvadhāraṇam. (S). * Svarupa, Shiva *** Meerut, (In progress).

François CHENET, «Vie et mort selon le Yogavasistha», Revue de l'histoire des religions , 2/1984, [En ligne], mis en ligne le 7 novembre 2005.

François CHENET
Vie et mort selon le Yogavasistha Life and death as Yogavasistha
p. 139-170
Résumé Abstract

L’épopée philosophique du Yogavasistha-Maharamayana , dont la date demeure incertaine (du huitième au treizième siècle apr. J.-C.), professe une philosophie originale située à la croisée du Vedanta non dualiste, du bouddhisme idéaliste et du sivaïsme du Cachemire. The epic philosophical Yogavasistha-Maharamayana, whose date remains uncertain (from eighth to the thirteenth century AD. AD), professing a philosophy original located at the crossroads of non-dualistic Vedanta, Buddhism and idealistic sivaïsme Kashmir . Elle contient notamment une série d’approches convergentes du phénomène de la mort et de méditations sur l’au-delà, à travers lesquelles se dessine une doctrine cohérente. It includes a series of converging approaches to the phenomenon of death and meditations on the afterlife, through which emerges a coherent doctrine. Après avoir décrit le processus de la mort-transition, non sans une grande acuité phénoménologique, le YV établit que les conditions d’existence post mortem consistent dans un tissu de fictions projetées dont le mécanisme de production se révèle analogue à celui du rêve. After describing the process of death-transition, with great acuity phenomenological, YV establishes that the conditions of existence post-mortem in a consistent fabric of fiction whose mechanism projected production is similar to that dream. L’article évoque alors l’interprétation indienne de l’état de rêve et montre ensuite comment le contenu d’expérience propre à l’existence intermédiaire se relie et s’articule aux phénomènes de la croyance et de la création mentale (bhavana) , avant d’élucider la signification métaphysique de l’opposition de la vie et de la mort. The article then refers to the interpretation of the Indian state of dream and then shows how the content of own experience that there are intermediate links and is the phenomena of belief and creative mental (bhavana) before clarifying the meaning of the metaphysical opposition of life and death. L’expérience létale se révèle ainsi comme la pierre de touche de l’idéalité ultime du monde, en sorte que le YV offre un exemple limite de relativisation du schème de la transmigration (samsara) . Experience has proved lethal as well as the touchstone of the ultimate ideal world, so that the YV offers an example limit relativization of the transmigration scheme (samsara).

For a Concordance to the short and longer versions of the text, see:

http://www.indologiewichtrach.ch/site/werkstatt/konkordanz/1.html

4. Study Day, 12.07.2006, organisiert von Sektion 4
Heike Franke

Indo-Persian Translation-Literature: the Laghu-Yogavasistha
H. Franke reported on Persian translations from Sanskrit, commissioned by the Muslim Mughal-emperors Akbar (r. 1556-1605) and Jahangir (r. 1605-1628) as part of the new ideological orientation: The justification of the Mughal-rule on the basis of Islamic religious values turned out to be at least problematical in an empire with a mostly non-Muslim population, especially as the emperors were more and more forced to cooperate with the Hinduistic rajas to support their throne. Because of this, Akbar ordered the scholar Abu ’l- Fazl to develop a legitimating system of the imperial claim to power that was independent of Islam and aimed at an integration of all subjects, regardless of their religious denominations. The translations from Sanskrit to Persian played an important role in the new ideological line of policy. The object of one of these translations was the well-known Laghu-Yogavasishtha, a philosophical text on the question, how to be released from the eternal cycle of life and death. One aspect of the presentation was asking for the methodological tools used by the Persian translators to make a Muslim audience understand the unfamiliar religious culture of the Hindus.

Spiritual Biography (O Phoenix, O Phoenix....)



This from Stephen Walker, who continues to be unsure whether to be impressed at the apparent relevance of person formation and self-cultivation in the extended Chinese tradition, or to hang it all and go play the qin in the company of cultivated and affected geese far away from Brahmins, Mandarins, and assorted odd-balls.

"O Phoenix, O Phoenix, how your virtue has declined," says Stephen.



>>
No serious skeptic can cite natural causes and ignore supernatural ones. A special footnote of thanks to Dan Hoffman for originating the theory that I am a reincarnation of Zhuangzi. Apparently Zhuangzi decided that the distortion and misunderstanding of his doctrine had gone on long enough and needed a missionary. What better than to use the barbarian system? He chose rebirth in the Rocky plateau of the High Uintah mountains of Utah where one can grow to outward maturity acquiring a minimal cultural endowment. (My ninth-grade English teacher read Horton the Elephant to us aloud for cultural enrichment!) It also provided an institution that would send the scion to Hong Kong in this relatively unformed state. So from a place where our nearest neighbors were three miles away I found myself whisked to a place where I saw more people in fifteen minutes than I had seen in my whole life. There I quickly learned there was more gospel to learn than to teach.
Of course in order for Zhuangzi's plan to work, one had to have such a religious institution. Zhuangzi had such a plan. A Vermont farmer possessed of his New England Yankee independence could create a religion. But he needed the impetus. History used the Chinese ginseng root. A mysterious stranger proposed to Joseph Smith, Sr., that he plant his farm to ginseng and sell it to China. I don't know if it was ever delivered, but no money came back and Smith lost his Vermont farm. He fell back on his mystical Vermont tradition of water dowsing but added the special claim that he could douse for gold. His son learned the trade as they wandered to Upstate New York. There Joseph Smith, Jr., continued his fascination with finding buried gold and an interest in ancient, exotic cultures and people. He found gold plates with a theory of the American Indians. Based on this book, he founded his iconoclastic, freethinking, quintessentially American religion. The chain of events leading to [the] founding of the Mormon empire in Utah and my own eventual return to Vermont is all fairly ordinary history. Those who sense a continuity with Mormonism in my thought patterns, despite my professed atheism, don't have it all wrong.
I do not intend to put much weight on this story. I shall rest my case on the explanatory power of the interpretive theory. I offer it here for those more impressed with pedigree and credentials than argument.
...

I wrote [a certain] article using the then current technology--Perfect Writer on a CP/M Kaypro II. Originally the appendix was included as a footnote in the text--the next footnote following the one expressing and explaining my skepticism about the alleged discovery of the sentence [adumbrated by Graham]. It was a much longer footnote since I was trying to show that the use of ci ("phrase") in Names and Objects was perfectly consistent with its normal meaning and in several places could not reasonably have been interpreted as "sentence". Perfect Writer, however, could not handle long footnotes. After several failed attempts to format the article, I finessed the problem by deleting the second long footnote and making it an appendix. Graham has since complained repeatedly to me in person and in print that I wrote a whole appendix rejecting his claim that never mentioned his case for the theory that they discovered the sentence...Of course, I mentioned, cited, and criticized his claim that they discovered the sentence in the first footnote. The second footnote addressed the subsequent question of whether they had changed the meaning of ci ("phrase") and begun to use it deliberately to refer only to sententials. If the appendix had remained a footnote, the two footnotes would have been consecutive and Graham's complaint would presumably have focused on the content of the issue rather than the perceived slight. As it was he could not get over that the appendix itself did not contain the argument in the footnote. He has never forgiven me and has passed the robe of transmission to Harbsmeier...Naturally, I have never forgiven Perfect Writer--which is [a] shame since it was otherwise a rather good word-processing editor. This text is being prepared in Word Perfect, which, as the reader will note, allows very long notes.<<
quoted from Chad Hansen, A Daoist Theory of Chinese Thought.

Stephen says that Chad Hansen is proud to have taught at Pittsburgh philosophy. You see, we are coming out, Stephen says. This is Hansen's passport photo:



and this,

Sources for Kashmiri Historiography

Weiterführende Literatur zur Historiographie des vormodernen Kaschmir

Quellen
# Rājataraṅgiṇī

Kalhaṇa
* The Rājataraṅgiṇī of Kalhaṇa. Ed. by DURGĀPRASĀDA, Son of Vrajalāla. Vol. I–II. Ed. by P. PETERSON. Bombay 1892–1894. (Bombay Sanskrit Series. XLV. LI).
* The Rája Taranginí; A History of Cashmír; Consisting of Four Separate Compilations: Commenced under the Auspices of the General Committee of Public. Instruction; transferred to the Asiatic Society; with other unfinished oriental works; and completed in 1835. Calcutta 1835.
* Kalhaṇa's Rājataraṅgiṇī. Chronicle of the kings of Kaśmīr. Sanskrit text with crit. notes. Ed. by M. A. STEIN. Bombay 1892.
* Rājataraṅgiṇī of Kalhaṇa. Ed., critically, and annotated ... by VISHVA BANDHU. Pt. 1–2. Hoshiarpur 1963–1965. (Woolner Indological Series. 8.).
* Rājataraṃgiṇī Kalhaṇakṛta. Ed. and transl. by R. SINGH. Vol. 1.2. Varanasi 1973–1976
Jonarāja
* The Rājataraṅgiṇī of Kalhaṇa. Ed. by DURGĀPRASĀDA, Son of Vrajalāla. Vol. III. Containing the Supplements to the Work of Jonarāja, Srīvara and Prājyabhaṭṭa. Ed. by P. PETERSON. Bombay 1896. (Bombay Sanskrit Series. LIV).
* The Rája Taranginí; A History of Cashmír; Consisting of Four Separate Compilations: Commenced under the Auspices of the General Committee of Public. Instruction; transferred to the Asiatic Society; with other unfinished oriental works; and completed in 1835. Calcutta 1835.
* Jonarāja, Rājataraṅgiṇī. Rājataraṅgiṇī of Jonarāja. Ed. with text comparative and critical annotations and an elaborate introduction by SRIKANTH KAUL. Hoshiarpur 1967. (Vishveshvaranand Inst. Publ. 432. = Woolner Indological Ser. 7).
Śrīvara. Zayna-Taraṅgiṇī & Rājataraṅgiṇī.
* The Rājataraṅgiṇī of Kalhaṇa. Ed. by DURGĀPRASĀDA, Son of Vrajalāla. Vol. III. Containing the Supplements to the Work of Jonarāja, Srīvara and Prājyabhaṭṭa. Ed. by P. PETERSON. Bombay 1896. (Bombay Sanskrit Series. LIV).
* The Rája Taranginí; A History of Cashmír; Consisting of Four Separate Compilations: Commenced under the Auspices of the General Committee of Public. Instruction; transferred to the Asiatic Society; with other unfinished oriental works; and completed in 1835. Calcutta 1835.
* Rājataraṅgiṇī of Śrīvara and Śuka. Ed., critically, and annotated with text-comparative data from original manuscripts and other available materials by SRIKANTH KAUL. Hoshiarpur 1966. (Vishveshvaranand Inst. Publ. 398 = Woolner Indological Ser. 8).
Śuka
* The Rājataraṅgiṇī of Kalhaṇa. Ed. by DURGĀPRASĀDA, Son of Vrajalāla. Vol. III. Containing the Supplements to the Work of Jonarāja, Srīvara and Prājyabhaṭṭa. Ed. by P. PETERSON. Bombay 1896. (Bombay Sanskrit Series. LIV).
* The Rája Taranginí; A History of Cashmír; Consisting of Four Separate Compilations: Commenced under the Auspices of the General Committee of Public. Instruction; transferred to the Asiatic Society; with other unfinished oriental works; and completed in 1835. Calcutta 1835.
* Rājataraṅgiṇī of Śrīvara and Śuka. Ed., critically, and annotated with text-comparative data from original manuscripts and other available materials by SRIKANTH KAUL. Hoshiarpur 1966. (Vishveshvaranand Inst. Publ. 398 = Woolner Indological Ser. 8).

# Bhānucandracaritra. By his pupil Gaṇi Siddhicandra Upādhyāya. Crit. ed. by MOHANLAL DALICHAND DESAI. [Singhi Jaina Series. 15]. Ahmedabad 1941.
# The Kashmirian Atharvaveda (School of the Paippalādas). Vol. 1. Ed. by MAURICE BLOOMFIELD and RICHARD GARBE. Baltimore 1901.
# Nīlamatapurāṇa. The Nīlamata Purāṇa. By VED KUMARI. Vol. 1.2. Srinagar 1968–1973.
# Śrīmaṅkhakakaviviracitaṃ śrīkaṇṭhacaritam. Jonarājakṛtayā ṭīkayā sametam. [Kāvyamālā. 3]. Bombay 1900. Reprint. Delhi 1983.
Übersetzungen
# Rājataraṅgiṇī

Kalhaṇa
* DUTT, J. C.: Kings of Kāshmīra. Vols 1–2. Calcutta 1887.
* Kalhaṇa’s Rājataraṅgiṇī. A Chronicle of the Kings of Kaśmīr. Transl., with an introd., comm. and app. by MARCUS AUREL STEIN. Vol. 1. 2. Westminster 1900.
* RANJIT SITARAM PANDIT: Rājataraṅgiṇī. The Saga of the Kings of Kaśmīr. Transl. from the original Saṃskṛta ... New Delhi 1935.
* Rājataraṃgiṇī Kalhaṇakṛta. Ed. and transl. by R. SINGH. Vol. 1.2. Varanasi 1973–1976.
Jonarāja
* DUTT, J. C.: Medieval Kashmir. Being a reprint of the Rajataranginis of Jonaraja, Shrivara and Shuka, as transl. into Engl. by J. C. Dutt and publ. in 1898 A.D. under the title "Kings of Kashmira", Vol. III. Ed. with notes, etc., by S. L. SADHU. New Delhi, 1993.
* Rājatarangini of Jonarāj. Transl., with crit. notes in Hindi by RAGHUNATH SINGH. [The Jaikrishnadas-Krishnadas Prachyavidya Granthamala.4.] Varanasi 1972.
Śrīvara
* DUTT, J. C.: Medieval Kashmir. Being a reprint of the Rajataranginis of Jonaraja, Shrivara and Shuka, as transl. into Engl. by J. C. Dutt and publ. in 1898 A.D. under the title "Kings of Kashmira", Vol. III. Ed. with notes, etc., by S. L. SADHU. New Delhi, 1993.
* Jaina-Rajatarangini of Srivara. Transl. with crit. notes in Hindi by RAGHUNATH SINGH. Pt. 1.2. [Chaukhamba Amarabharati Granthamala.11.] Varanasi, 1977.
* DHAR, KASHI NATH: Śrīvara’s Zaina Rājataraṅgiṇī. English translation and annotations. New Delhi, 1994.
Śuka
* DUTT, J. C.: Medieval Kashmir. Being a reprint of the Rajataranginis of Jonaraja, Shrivara and Shuka, as transl. into Engl. by J. C. Dutt and publ. in 1898 A.D. under the title "Kings of Kashmira", Vol. III. Ed. with notes, etc., by S. L. Sadhu. New Delhi, 1993.

Übersetzung aus dem Persischen
* Bahāristān-i-Shāhī. A chronicle of Mediaeval Kashmir. K. N. Pandit. Calcutta, 1991.
Übersetzung ins Persische
* Rāj tarangīnī: Tārīkh-i Kashmīr. Mullā Shāh Muḥammad Shāhābādī. [Markaz-i Taḥqīqāt-i Fārsi-i Īrān va Pākistān] Rāvalpindī, 1974.

Studien

* Aklujkar, Ashok:Rājataraṅgiṇī 1.176.P. Bandhyopadhyaya (ed.), Ancient Indian History, Philosophy and Culture. Essays in Memory of Professor Radhagovinda Basak Vidyāvācaspati. Calcutta 1987: 224–245.
* Baldissera, Fabrizia: Tradition of Protest: the Development of Ritual Suicide from Religious Act to Political Statement. In: Boundaries, Dynamics and Construction of Traditions in South Asia. Ed. by FEDERICO SQUARCINI. Firenze 2005: 515–568.
* Basham, A. L.: Harṣa of Kashmir and the Iconoclast Ascetics. BSOAS 12, No ¾ (1948): 688-691.
* Bhatt, S. (ed.): Kashmiri Pandits A Cultural Heritage. New Delhi 1995.
* Bühler, Georg: Detailed Report of a Tour in Search of Sanskrit Mss made in Kaśmir, Rajputana, and Central India. Bombay. 1877
* Clauson, Gerard L.M.: Catalogue of the Stein Collection of Sanskrit MSS. from Kashmir. JRAS 1912: 587-627.
* Das, Sukla: Jonarāja and Dvitīya Rājataraṅgiṇī. In: Indological Studies. Prof. D. C. Sircar Commemoration Volume. Ed. by S. K. MAITY, UPENDRA THAKUR. New Delhi 1987: 61-64.
* Dogra, Ramesh Chander: Jammu and Kashmir: a select and annotated bibliography. London 1986.
* Dutt, J. C.: Medieval Kashmir. Being a reprint of the Rajataranginis of Jonaraja, Shrivara and Shuka, as transl. into Engl. by J. C. Dutt and publ. in 1898 A.D. under the title "Kings of Kashmira", Vol. III. Ed. with notes, etc., by S. L. SADHU. New Delhi 1993.
* Goetz, Hermann: Die Stellung der indischen Chroniken im Rahmen der indischen Geschichte. [Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des Buddhismus 11]. München-Neubiberg. 1924
* Goetz, Hermann: Eine indische Königstragödie. ZDMG 82 (1928): 207–216.
* Goetz, Hermann: Studies in the History, Religion and Art of Classical and Mediaeval India. Ed. by Hermann Kulke. [Schriftenreihe des Südasien-Instituts der Universität Heidelberg. 16] Wiesbaden 1974.
* Habib, M. and Nizami, K. A.: A Comprehensive History of India. Vol. 5,2: The Delhi Sultanate AD 1206-1526. 2. ed. Bombay 1993.
* Hardy, P.: Review of Mohibbul Hasan [1. ed., 1959]. in: BSOAS 23,2 (1960): 406-407.
* Hasan, Mohibbul: Kashmir under the Sultans. [3rd ed.] Ed. HAMID NASSEM. Srinagar 2002.
* Hultzsch, Eugen: Extracts from Kalhaṇa’s Rājataraṅgiṇī. IA 18 (1889): 65-73; 97-105.
* Hultzsch, Eugen: Extracts from Kalhaṇa’s Rājataraṅgiṇī. IA 19 (1890): 261-268.
* Hultzsch, Eugen: Critical Notes on Kalhaṇa’s Seventh Taraṅga. IA 40 (1911): 97-102.
* Hultzsch, Eugen: Critical Notes on Kalhaṇa’s Eigth Taraṅga. IA 42 (1913): 301-306.
* Hultzsch, Eugen: Kritische Bemerkungen zur Rājataraṅgiṇī. ZDMG 69 (1915): 129-167; 271-282.
* Jahn, Karl: Die Indiengeschichte des Rašid ad-Dīn. Einleitung, vollst. Übers., Komm. u. 80 Texttafeln. [Denkschriften der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. 144. = Veröff. der Iranischen Komm. 8]. Wien 1980.
* Kilam, Jia Lal: Justice Jia Lal Kilam, A History of Kashmiri Pandits. (1st publ. 1955). Rev. ed. by ADVAITAVADINI KAUL. Delhi 2003.
* Kosambi, D. D.: Origins of feudalism in Kaśmīr. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bombay New Series 31/32(1956/1957): 108-120.
* Kölver, Bernhard: Textkritische und philologische Untersuchungen zur Rājataraṅgiṇī des Kalhaṇa. [VOHD, Suppl. 12] Wiesbaden 1971.
* Kreyenborg, Elisabeth: Der XXV. Gesang des Śrīkaṇṭhacaritam des Maṅkha. Ein Beitrag zur altindischen Literaturgeschichte. Philos.-Diss., Münster 1930.
* Kulke, Hermann: Geschichtsschreibung und Geschichtsbild im hinduistischen Mittelalter. Saeculum 30 (1979): 100-112. (Vgl. unten: Kulke 2001).
* Kulke, Hermann (et al.): Indische Geschichte vom Altertum bis zur Gegenwart. Literaturbericht über neuere Veröffentlichungen. [Historische Zeitschrift. Sonderheft 10]. München 1981.
* Kulke, Hermann: Historiography in Early Medieval India. In: Explorations in the History of South Asia. Essays in Honour of Dietmar Rothermund. Ed. by GEORG BERKEMER et al. New Delhi 2001: 71-83. (Vgl. oben Kulke 1979).
* van Limburg Brouwer, Petrus Abraham Samuel: Het boek der Koningen : eene proeve van Indische geschiedenis. Leiden 1867.
* Majumdar, A.K.: The Rājataraṅgiṇīs as Sources of the History of Kashmir during the Sultanate. Bhāratīya Vidyā XVI,1 (1956): 1-12.
* Majumdar, A.K.: Indien im Mittelalter und in der frühen Neuzeit. (Bearb. v. HERMANN GOETZ.) In: Propyläen Weltgeschichte. Eine Universalgeschichte. Hrsg. v. GOLO MANN u. AUGUST NITSCHKE. Bd 6. Berlin usw. 1964: S. 113-187.
* Majumdar, A.K. (Ed.): The Delhi Sultanate. 4th ed. (first publ. 1960). [The History and Culture of the Indian People]. Bombay 1990.
* Majumdar, A.K. (Ed.): The Mughal Empire 3rd ed. (first publ. 1974). [The History and Culture of the Indian People]. Bombay 1994.
* Ikari, Yasuke: Map of Ancient Tīrthas in Kashmir Valley. In: A Study of the Nīlamata – Aspects of Hinduism in Ancient Kashmir. Ed. by YASUKE IKARI. Kyoto 1994: 425-442.
* Marquart, J.: Zur älteren Chronologie von Kaśmīr. In: Album Kern. Leiden 1903: 341-348.
* Masson, J.L. and Patwardhan, M.V.: Śāntarasa and Abhinavagupta’s Philosophy of Aesthetics. Reprint (1.ed.: 1969). [Bhandarkar Oriental Series 9]. Poona 1985.
* Mohan, Krishna: Early Medieval History of Kashmir [with special reference to the Loharas A.D. 1003–1171]. New Delhi 1981.
* Naudou, J.: L’autorité royale au Kaśmir médiéval. JA 2 (1963) : 217–227.
* Pandit, Ranjit Sitaram: Rājataraṅgiṇī. The Saga of the Kings of Kaśmīr. Transl. from the original Saṃskṛt. New Delhi 1935.
* Parmu, R. K.: A History of Muslim Rule in Kashmir. 1320–1819. New Delhi 1969.
* Pathak, V.S.: Ancient Historians of India. A Study in Historical Biographies. Bombay 1966.
* Pollock, Shelton: The Death of Sanskrit. Comparative Studies in Society and His-tory. 43,2 (2001): 392-426.
* Raina, L.N.: Kalhana - the great chronicler. In: Kashmiri Pandits, S. 167-170.
* Ray, H.C.: The Dynastic History of Northern India (Early Mediaeval Period). Vol. 1. 2nd ed. (first publ. in 1931). Delhi.
* Ray, R. Rājataraṅgiṇī-Kośa, a Descriptive Index of Names and Subjects of Kalhaṇa’s Rājataraṅgiṇī. Benares 1967.
* Rau, Wilhelm: Naturkundliches aus Kalhaṇas Rājataraṅgiṇī (vollendet A.D. 1148). StII 19 (1994): 215-219.
* Reddy, D. V. Subba: Glimpses of famines, plagues, medicine and magic in ancient and medieval Kashmir as described in Rajatarangini (12th century). In: BIHM 3,1 (Jan.1973); 3,3 (Jul.1973); 3,4 (Oct.1973), S. 9-23; 111-121; 189-200.
* Rothermund, Dietmar: Krisenherd Kaschmir. Der Konflikt der Atommächte Indien und Pakistan. [Beck’sche Reihe. 1505]. München 2002.
* Sadhu, S. L. Tales from the Rājataraṅgiṇī. Śrīnagar 1967.
* Salomon, Richard: Notes on the Translations of Kalhaṇa’s Rājataraṅgiṇī (I-IV). Berliner Indologische Studien 3 (1987): 149-179.
* Sanderson, Alexis: Religion and the State: Initiating the Monarch in Śaivism and the Buddhist Way of Mantras. Heidelberg 2005.
* Saqi, Moti Lal: Kalhana and Buddhism. In: Kashmiri Pandits 1995, S. 462-465. S. 71-75, I-VI.
* Schimmel, Annemarie: Islam in the Indian Subcontinent. [HbO 2,4,3]. Leiden 1980.
* Schimmel, Annemarie: Der Islam im indischen Subkontinent. [Grundzüge. 48]. Darmstadt 1983.
* Schmidt, Richard: Das Kathākautukam des Śrīvara. Verglichen mit Dschāmī’s Jusuf und Zuleikha. Kiel 1883.
* Schmidt, Richard: Śrīvara’s Kathākautuka. Die Geschichte von Joseph in persisch-indischem Gewande. Sanskrit und Deutsch. Kiel 1898.
* Schnellenbach, Christiane: Geschichte als "Gegengeschichte"?: Historiographie in Kalhaṇas Rājataraṅgiṇī. Philos. Diss. Kiel 1995. Marburg 1996 [Microfiche-Ausg.] Edition Wissenschaft. Reihe Orientalistik. 3.
* Singh, Kushwant: Ranjit Singh. Maharajah of the Punjab. Bombay 1962.
* Slaje, Walter: Kaschmir im Mittelalter und die Quellen der Geschichtswissenschaft. Essay mit Anmerkungen. IIJ 48, 1 (2005): 1-70. [Erschienen 2006].
* Slaje, Walter: Medieval Kashmir and the Science of History. [The University of Texas at Austin, Madden Lecture 2003-2004]. Austin 2004.
* Slaje, Walter: A Note on the Genesis and Character of Śrīvara's So-Called "Jaina-Rājataraṅgiṇī". In: JAOS 125.3 (2005): 379-388.
* Slaje, Walter: Three Bhaṭṭas, Two Sulṭāns, and the Kashmirian Atharvaveda. In: The Atharvaveda and its Paippalādaśākhā. Ed. by Arlo Griffiths and Annette Schmiedchen. [Geisteskultur Indiens. Texte und Studien. Band 11]. Aachen 2007: 329-353.
* Slaje, Walter: The Last Buddhist of Kashmir as Recorded by Jonarāja. In: Sanskrit Studies Vol. 2 Saṃvat 2063-64 (CE 2006-07). Ed. by Wagish Shukla. Special Centre for Sanskrit Studies, JNU New Delhi 2007.
* Sohini, S. V.: The Chavillakara fragment in Kalhana's Rajatarangini. In: JBRS 36,1/2(May-Jun.1950), S. 71-75, I-VI.
* Stein, Marcus Aurel: Notes on the Ancient Topography of the Pīr Pantsāl Route. JASB 1895: 381ff.
* Stein, Marcus Aurel: Zur alten Topographie des Pīr Pantsāl. In: Gurupūjākaumudī. Festgabe Albrecht Weber dargebracht. Leipzig 1896: 72ff.
* Stein, Marcus Aurel: Memoir on Maps Illustrating the Ancient Geography of Kaśmīr. Calcutta 1899.
* Storey, C. A.: Persian Literature. Vol. 1,1. Reprint. (first publ. 1927). London 1989.
* Tokunaga, Muneo: Description of Temples and Tīrthas in the Nīlamatapurāṇa. Vss 989–1356a. In: A Study of the Nīlamata – Aspects of Hinduism in Ancient Kashmir. Ed. by YASUKE IKARI. Kyoto 1994: 399–421.
* Warder, A. K.: An Introduction to Indian Historiography. [Monographs of the Department of Sanskrit and Indian Studies, University of Toronto. 1]. Bombay 1972.
* Weber, Siegfried: Die persische Verwaltung Kaschmirs (1842 – 1892). Band I + II. [Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften Philosophisch-Historische Klasse Sitzungsberichte, 754. Band. Veröffentlichungen zur Iranistik Nr. 37], Hrsg. v. Bert G. Fragner und Velizar Sadovski, Wien 2007.
* Witzel, Michael: On Indian Historical Writing: The Role of Vaṃśāvalīs. Journal of the Japanese Association of South Asian Studies 2 (1990): 1-57.
* Witzel, Michael: Kashmiri Manuscripts and Pronunciation. In: A Study of the Nīlamata. Aspects of Hinduism in Ancient Kashmir. Ed. by YASUKE IKARI. Kyoto 1994: 1-53.
* Witzel, Michael: The Brahmins of Kashmir. In: A Study of the Nīlamata. Aspects of Hinduism in Ancient Kashmir. Ed. by YASUKE IKARI. Kyoto 1994: 237-294.
* Wojtilla, Gyula: Sir Aurel Stein’s Kashmirian Māhātmya Collection in the Library of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences. In: Jubilee Volume of the Oriental Collection 1951–1976. Papers presented on the occasion of the 25th Anniversary of the Oriental Collection of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences. Ed. by Eva Apor. (Oriental Studies. 2.) Budapest 1978: 215–224.
* Wojtilla, Gyula: Notes on Popular Śaivism and Tantra in Eleventh Century Kashmir (A Study on Kṣemendra’s Samayamātṛkā). In: Tibetan and Buddhist Studies. Ed. by LOUIS LIGETI. Vol. 2. Budapest 1984: 381–389.

Miscl. Notes on the Moksa-Upaya

The Moksa-upaya and the Yogavasistha, reflecting complicated textual histories, the second being a redaction of the first, are among the most interesting of texts to emerge from India. Here is almost a strictly bibliographic selection for future research:


Notes are made courtesy of materials available from:
Historiographie und Geisteskultur Kaschmirs
Arbeitsstelle der
Akademie der Wissenschaften und der Literatur, Mainz
an der Martin-Luther-Universität Halle-Wittenberg
(Alle Rechte vorbehalten, all rights reserved, Arbeitsstelle der Akademie der Wissenschaften und der Literatur, Mainz an der Martin-Luther-Universität Halle-Wittenberg, 06099 Halle (Saale).)


Einführung
Der Mokṣopāya („Weg zur Befreiung“), Werk im Umfang von 30.000 Doppelversen eines kaschmirischen Anonymus aus der Mitte des 10. Jh.s, begründet auf der Basis philosophisch unikaler Ideen einen in der indischen Geistesgeschichte einzigartigen Welterklärungsentwurf, der ohne Berufung auf traditionelle Autoritäten entwickelt wurde. Vor Entdeckung und Nutzbarmachung (1994 ff) der kaschmirischen Rezension, in der die ursprüngliche Werkfassung sich verbirgt, wurde dieses nach Form und Inhalt einzigartige philosophische Literaturwerk in Indien und Europa ausschließlich in einer späten, durch mehrere Redaktionsschübe tendenziös veränderten Vulgata-Rezension (‛Yogavāsiṣṭha’) rezipiert. Durch strukturelle und begriffliche Modifizierungen wurde dieser Version der Anschein eines Offenbarungswerkes verliehen. Derart in althergebrachte Mythen und Traditionen eingebettet, entfaltete das Yogavāsiṣṭha in Indien eine bis heute andauernde Wirkungsgeschichte. Doch war es u.a. der autoritative Charakter von ‛Offenbarungen’, gegen den der Autor – als indischer ‛Frühaufklärer’ insofern erfolglos geblieben – sich mit Vehemenz gewandt hatte. Unkonventionelle Standpunkte wie dieser wurden aus der pan-indischen Yogavāsiṣṭha-Rezeption – ebenso wie die menschliche Autorschaft des Werkes – von Entsager-Traditionen des Advaitavedānta (saṃnyāsin) sowie von Exponenten gläubiger Gottesfrömmigkeit (Rāma-Bhakti) gewollt verdrängt. Weltanschaulich über sekundäre Mythisierung entsprechend umgearbeitet und adaptiert, vereinnahmten sie das Werk schließlich für eigene Traditionen. Die formale und geistige Gestalt des Mokṣopāya selbst wurde dadurch aber aus der indischen Wahrnehmung völlig ausgeblendet und geriet allmählich in Vergessenheit. Der Text ist in einem Sprachstil verfaßt, der je nach Anlaß zwischen höfisch-literarischem und philosophisch-wissenschaftlichem Sanskrit wechselt. Aufgrund des Stils und der Neuschöpfung narrativer, parabolisch angewandter Stoffe ist er als Literatur (kāvya) zu charakterisieren, dem Inhalt nach als philosophische Welterklärung, vom Anliegen her aber als ‛Soteriologie der Selbstbefreiung’ aus dem Daseinswandel. Das Werk zeigt einen ‛erleuchtungsdidaktisch’ strukturierten Aufbau, der einem sich graduell vertiefenden Verständnishorizont des Schülers Rechnung trägt. Dieses unter den Sprach- und Texttrümmern des Yogavāsiṣṭha verschüttete Monument indischer Philosophie und Literatur soll nun zum ersten Mal in seinem Originalwortlaut aus den Handschriften der kaschmirischen Rezension wiedergewonnen, und dabei ein unikaler philosophischer Kopf und geistreicher Poet für die Geistesgeschichte gerettet werden, der im 10. Jh. Raum- und Zeitvorstellungen als subjektiv und nur relativ zur eigenen Wahrnehmung bestimmbar definiert hat. Mit Hilfe einer historisch-kritischen Gesamtedition, die mittels des wiederhergestellten Wortlauts auch die verlorengegangenen Ideen und sprachlichen Idiosynkrasien des Autors rekonstruiert, werden diese sich in ihren inneren Zusammenhängen erschließen, deuten und sodann in eine Universalgeschichte der philosophischen Ideen und der Literatur einordnen lassen. Darüber hinaus sind neue Erkenntnisse vor allem auch zu erwarten für: Linguistik (reiches und datierbares Material zum regionalen kaschmirischen Sanskrit, Wortschatz, Semantik, Wortbildung und Syntax), Philosophiegeschichte, Religionssoziologie (vita activa contra vita contemplativa), Universalgeschichte (indischer Erlösungsrationalismus, Ansätze zu Aufklärungsideen), Literatur (stoffliche Neuschöpfungen), Kultur- und Realienkunde des mittelalterlichen Kaschmir.



Vom Moksopaya-Sastra Zum Yogavasistha-Maharamayana: Philologische Untersuchungen Zur Entwicklungs- Und Uberlief-Erungsgeschichte Eines Inndische Lehrwerks Mit Anspruch Auf Heilsrelevanz
Journal article by Patrick Olivelle; The Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. 117, 1997.
The State of Research to date on the Yogavasiÿ÷ha
(Mokÿop˜ya)
By Lekh Raj Manjdadria
The following is the summary of the major research results achieved to date at the
University of Halle (Germany) in works undertaken there by the Moksopaya Project
Research Group (Dr Juergen Hanneder, Peter Stephan, Susanne Stinner), founded and
supervised by Prof Walter Slaje.
The textual doctrine aims for the non-ascetic (e.g. the grhastha-asrama) state of
liberation whilst living (jivanmukti), it is interesting to note that the text appears still
not to have been successfully categorised in terms of the history of Indian literature or
philosophy for various reasons, which are outside the scope of this abstract.
In the course of research investigation, analysis and evaluation over a period of 12
years, it has become evident that there are two strands of transmission, the present text
known as the Yogavasistha (YV) and an older version called the Moksopaya (MU),
which has been commented upon by Bhaskarakantha. Historical investigations
revealed unexpected results; in the main it became clear of the two strands of textual
transmission, the presently Yogavasistha and a completely independent transmission,
which preserved an early state of textual development called the Moksopaya.
Interestingly its history is closely related to the region of Kashmir, where it is
believed the text may have taken its form, this being represented by textual reference
to geographical, botanical and climatic descriptions and the fact that there is mention
of King Yasaskaradeva of Kashmir (r.939-948)
On the title it is apparent that the word Yogavasistha is a recent one only testified to
by a small number of texts, there is no internal textual reference to this title. Whereas
there is plenty of internal reference in which the text refers to itself as the Moksopaya
or Moksopaya Sastra.
On examination of the two strands it became apparent in the YV there were some
38.500 variants that had distorted the original character, philosophy and usage of the
ancient version transmitted in Kashmir. These variants have been categorised as
scribal errors that were either non-intentional and others as clearly wilful
modifications.
The non-intentional differences are seen as obvious misinterpretations of characters
made in good faith, possibly due to perhaps the bad state of a manuscript.
Focusing on the wilful changes by the redactors, the following results became
apparent.
Firstly there is the introduction of frame stories that emphasise the “orthodox”
brahmanical ideology, this particular feature is absent in the MU and as such
considered not to be the works of the orthodox tradition. Secondly there is the
insertion of chapters emphasising Rama-bhaki, whereas the original ethos indicates
Rama Bhaktas are nothing but lazy fools (Nirvana, Purvardha, 127-128) as they do
not rely on their own power of ‘manly-ness’ (paurusa). Thirdly there is an attempt at
reversing the meaning of passages that are specifically directed against Sruti, the
Vedas and rituals, by changing the original wording. Fourthly, there is the obvious
and complete deletion of particularly Buddhist terminology. Fifthly, there is what can

Page 2
be described as the numerous tendentious changes of plural-forms of nouns and verbs
to the singular. This indicates the originator of the MU used a public sermon mode.
Finally, there is without doubt what is considered as the vedanticizing of the text. The
MU teaches monism (advaita) which is characteristically different from that of
Sankara’s Advaita Vedanta. On some of these wilful changes I shall expand a little
more on later.
Latest investigations by J.Hanneder
1
acknowledge,
“It is difficult to gauge the impact that the establishment of the original text will have on our
understanding of the philosophy of this work… We can imagine that it is only because of the
cultural and temporal distance, and the domination of Advaita-Vedantic thought in modern
India, that the transformation of the Moksopaya into the Yogavasistha is not perceived as
what it is in a historical perspective: a spectacular appropriation of a heterodox philosophy
contained in one of the largest works in Indian literary history, a work that, although not
protected by wide-spread philosophical tradition, has remained fascinating through its
unique blend of philosophy and narrative. The extent of changes in readings, the attempts to
restructure the work, …and the consistency that can be observed in purging the text of
specific terms, clearly points to a planned revision of the text to bring it in line with the
philosophy of the transmitters.”
Interestingly Helmut Von Glasenapp, recognises the work to be “probably the greatest
philosophical poetic work of all times” and the present researchers recognise the
author has created a philosophy entirely of his own, making use of other Darsanas not
in an additive manner, but rather an inclusive way.
The original author endorses his authoritativeness on the contents of his works, that
claim a human authorship (pauruseyam idam sastram) and dismisses any authoritative
scripture that lacked reasoning (vicara) and rational arguments (yukti). Here the text
makes clear reference that the reasoned statements of even a child or women where
preferred to revelations of Rsis and gods. “Even if it were of human origin (every)
Sastra has to be accepted provided it instructs by means of arguments. Any other,
even composed by Rsis, should be dismissed. … The word of even a child must be
accepted, if it is based on reasonable arguments. Any other should be dismissed like
straw, be it even taught by Brahma (II 18, 2-3)”
This view has been considered differently by later redactors, in their claim of a
superhuman authorship in the YV, with changes in the philosophy, diction and shape
of the composition, which has been wilfully planned. The Kashmir version appears to
be what may be seen as the closest to an original version with the intentions of the
author.
Looking at the wilful changes, philological investigations showed interesting results.
The electronic version of the text prepared by Prof Slaje so far now covers more than
20,000 Slokas, which is approximately two-thirds of the whole MU text. Comparisons
carried out with the YV clearly point to a planned revision of the MU, which results
in a vedanticised YV. For example, firstly the author’s homilies, dialogues (vah) at
times are coarsely (maha-mudha, etc.) directed at a public audience, which are
apparent in the MU, in the YV in a majority of cases the redactors have inserted the
literary frame story of the courtly dialogue between sage Vasistha and the Epic hero
Rama. Here what is obvious is the factual replacement of the MU’s plural nouns and
1
WZKS 44(2000) 186.

Page 3
verbs into singular ones, and the toning down of coarse expressions to make them
acceptable for the plot set in Dasaratha’s court as a literary fiction. Evidence shows 80
percent of these plural forms have been altered to the singular in the YV. This is a
clear attempt of adapting the wording of the public sermon mode of the MU to the
later instructions of Vasistha to Rama in the YV.
Secondly there are obvious changes in the YV whereby Buddhist concepts and
terminology have been removed, evidence of the investigation of 20,000 Slokas so far
shows there is 100 percent removal of such terms and terminology. For example,
caitta (‘mental factor’, a fundamentally Buddhist term) is present in the MU and has
been 100 percent deleted in the YV. Similarly, the term nanartha
2
(expressing here
the ‘absolute non-existence of cognitive objects’) has also been 100 percent deleted
by the redactors through their reworking. The fundamental ontological notion in the
MU is the non-existence of the objects of cognition. To recognise this fact leads to
ultimate detachment (vairagya) from these objects. Interiorization of such a rational
detachment causes a lasting mental attitude of dispassion and non-involvement with
worldly things and matters, however, without swerving from one’s everyday duties
and activities. This is the original character of the jivanmukti as taught in the present
work. As primarily a ‘means to release’ (moksa-upaya) for non-ascetics it was from
the outset what appears to be intended for the householders of the nobility (ksatriya)
and the trading (vaisya) class, who by way of maintaining their social duties
(svadharma) safeguarded and supported the continuation and prosperity of the ancient
Indian society. Liberation within the text is clearly available for all, men, women and
children, irrespective of their nobility, by following the Moksopaya’s doctrine they
did not need to fear being excluded from an entitlement to release, an entitlement
which in the course of time had predominantly become a privilege for renouncers
(samnyasin) only. Rama is presented here, as a model for such an ideal type of man,
who, although having already attained release, still remained active all of his life,
keeping to his innate duties as a ruler.
I hope this provides an insight of the present state of affairs, since it is not possible in
an abstract to expand on the findings fully; I refer the interested reader to the
introduction of the recently published Vairagya-Prakarana of the Moksopaya Tika
3
and the bibliography there.
Summary compiled by consent of the original authors Prof W. Slaje and Dr J. Hanneder.
by
Mr Lekh Raj Manjdadria
B.Pharm (Hons). M.Sc.BioPharm. Dipp. CommPharm. MRPharmS.
M.A.Indian Religions. SOAS.
2
Nan a technical term used by Panini for negative particles (na.a-,an-).belonging to the science of
grammar. Nanartha meaning “no” that is empty of meaning, an expression of non-existence, closely
related to abhava (Bhaskarantha (MT II 19,23) explained as having non-existence.
3
Bhaskarantha’s Moksopaya-Tika. Vol.I. Shaker Verlag A
ACHEN
2002
ABKÜRZUNGEN

ABORI = Annals of the Bhandarkar Research Institute (Poona)
AS = Asiatische Studien (Bern etc.)
B = Brhad-Yogavasistha
BhG = Bhagavadgita
IHQ = The Indian Historical Quarterly (Calcutta)
IIJ = Indo-Iranian Journal (Dordrecht)
JAHRS = Journal of the Andhra Historical Research Society (Rajahmundry)
JASB = Journal of Asiatic Society of Bombay (Bombay)
JOR = Journal of Oriental Research (Madras),
L = Laghu-Yogavasistha
NIA = New Indian Antiquary (Bombay)
PO = Poona Orientalist (Poona),
WZKS = Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde Südasiens (Wien)
YV = Yogavasistha
YVS = Yogavasisthasara


ZITIERTE LITERATUR

[Atreya 1932] Atreya, B. L.: The Yogavasistha and its Philosophy. 3. Aufl. (Nachdruck der erweiterten, 2. Aufl., 1938) Moradabad 1966. • Siehe Nr. 2.
[Atreya 1935] Atreya, B. L.: A probable date of composition of Yogavasistha. In: Proceedings and Transactions of the Seventh All-India Oriental Conference (Baroda 1933), Baroda (S. 56–59).
[Atreya 1936] Atreya, B. L.: The Philosophy of the Yogavasistha. Adyar (Madras). 2. Aufl.: Moradabad 1981.
[Banerji 1971] Banerji, S. Ch.: A Companion to Sanskrit Literature. Delhi/Varanasi/Patna.
[Bhattacharya 1925] Bhattacharya, S.: The Yogavasistha Ramayana, its probable date and place of inception. In: Proceedings and Transactions of the Third Oriental Conference (Madras 1924), Madras (S. 545-554). • Siehe Nr. 1.
[Bhattacharya 1948] Bhattacharya, S.: The Emergency of an Adhyatma-Sastra or the Birth of the Yogavasistha Ramayana. In: IHQ 24 (S. 201–212). • Siehe Nr. 6.
[Divanji 1935] Divanji, P. C.: The date and place of origin of the Yogavasistha. In: Proceedings and Transacions of the Seventh All-India Oriental Conference (Baroda 1933), Baroda (S. 15–30). • Siehe Nr. 3.
[Divanji 1938] Divanji, P. C.: Further light on the date of the Yogavasistha. In: PO 3 (S. 29–44). • Siehe Nr. 4.
[Divanji 1938/39] Divanji, P. C.: The text of the Laghuyogavasistha. In: NIA 1 (S. 697–715). • Siehe Nr. 4, Anm.
[Divanji 1959/60] Divanji, P. C.: Bhagavadgita and Bhagavata Purana as models for the Yogavasistha. In: JASB 34/35 (S. 44–58). • Siehe Nr. 8.
[Farquhar 1920] Farquhar, J. N: An Outline of the Religious Literature in India. Oxford 1920.
[Hacker 1947] Hacker, P.: Sankaracarya and Sankarabhagavatpada – preliminary remarks concerning the authorship problem. In: NIA 9 (bzw. P. Hacker, Kleine Schriften, Wiesbaden 1978 [= Glasenapp-Stiftung, 15.], S. 41–58).
[Hanneder und Slaje 2005] J. Hanneder und W. Slaje: Noch einmal zur langen und kurzen Version des Yogavasistha in ihrem Verhältnis zur Moksopaya-Rezension. In: Asiatische Studien (Bern), 59 (S. 509–531). • Siehe Nr. 13.
[Karmarkar 1955] Karmarkar, R. D.: Mutual relation of the Yogavasistha, the Lankavatarasutra and the Gaudapada-Karikas. In: ABORI 36 (S. 298–305). • Siehe Nr. 7.
[Konow 1901] Raja-Çekhara's Karpura-Manjari. Critically edited […] by S. Konow and translated […] by Ch. R. Lanman. Cambridge, Mass. [= Harvard Oriental Series, 4.]
[Raghavan 1939 a] Raghavan, V.: The Yogavasistha Quotations in the Jivanmuktiviveka of Vidyaranya. In: JAHRS 12 (S. 149–156).
[Raghavan 1939 b] Raghavan, V.: The Yogavasistha and the Bhagavadgita and the place of origin of the Yogavasistha. In: JOR 13 (S. 73–82).
[Raghavan 1939 c] Raghavan, V.: The Date of the Yogavasistha. In: JOR 13 (S. 110-128). • Siehe Nr. 5.
[Raghavan 1972] Raghavan, V.: The author of the Laghu-Yogavasistha. In: S. K. De Memorial Volume, Calcutta (S. 53–63). • Siehe Nr. 9.
[Schrader 1930] Schrader, F. O.: The Kashmir Recension of the Bhagavadgita. Stuttgart. [= Contributions to Indian Philology and History of Religion, 3.]
[Slaje 1994] Vom Moksopaya-Sastra zum Yogavasistha-Maharamayana. Philologische Untersuchungen zur Entwicklungs- und Überlieferungsgeschichte eines indischen Lehrwerks mit Anspruch auf Heilsrelevanz. Wien 1994. [= Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften: Veröffentlichungen der Kommission für Sprachen und Kulturen Südasiens, 27.] • Siehe Nr. 11.
[Thomi 1980] Thomi, P.: Cudala – Eine Episode aus dem Yogavasistha. Nach der längeren und kürzeren Rezension unter Berücksichtigung von Handschriften aus dem Sanskrit übersetzt. Wichtrach. • Siehe Nr. 10.
[Thomi 1999] Thomi, P. (ed.): Yogavasisthasara "Die Quintessenz des Yogavasistha". Teil I–II. Wichtrach 1999. [= Vasistha-Grantha-Mala, 1.1–2.]. • Siehe Nr. 12.
[Winternitz 1904–1922] Winternitz, M.: Geschichte der indischen Literatur. Bd. 1–3. (Leipzig.) Nachdruck: Stuttgart 1968.

Historiographie und Geisteskultur Kaschmirs
Arbeitsstelle der
Akademie der Wissenschaften und der Literatur, Mainz
an der Martin-Luther-Universität Halle-Wittenberg
Anonymus Casmiriensis (10.Jhd.)„Weg zur Befreiung“ (Mokṣopāya) in 30.000 Versen. Historisch-kritische Gesamtedition. Gefördert durch die DFG. In Zusammenarbeit mit: · Università La Sapienza, Roma (Prof. Torella / Dr. Lo Turco): „Critical Edition of the Fragments of Bhāskarakaṇṭha’s Commentary on the Nirvāṇaprakaraṇa“· Universität Lund (Prof. Qvarnström / Dr. Gansten), gefördert durch das Swedish Research Council: „Mokṣopāya Translation Project. A Critical Translation of the 3rd Book [Utpattiprakaraṇa]”.Bibliographie zum Mokṣopāya South Asia Research Documentation Services (Sards): Zentrale Datenbankredaktion.Sards dokumentiert Forschungsliteratur zum Raum Südasien (aktueller Berichtszeitraum 1783 bis 2000, derzeit 56.000 Titel). Alphabetische und Schlagwort-Recherchen sowie Ausgabe wissenschaftlicher Literaturzitate über das Internet.Gefördert durch die Universität Halle und das Land Sachsen-Anhalt sowie die Helmuth von Glasenapp-Stiftung, Mainz


Mokṣopāya
Kritische Edition des Utpattiprakaraṇa
Gefördert durch die DFG.
Projektbeginn: August 1999.
Projektleiter: Prof. Dr. Walter Slaje.
Projektbearbeiter (August 1999-März 2002): Dr. Jürgen Hanneder.
(2002-2007) Peter Stephan, M.A.

Jürgen Hann Eder Studies on the Mokṣopāya. (habilitation)
Peter Stephan, MA Lavaṇa The episode in Mokṣopāya: Critical Edition and study (2008).
Susanne Stinner (M.A.): Untersuchungen zur handschriftlichen Überlieferung der Kurzfassungen des Mokṣopāya/Yogavāsiṣṭha

Monday, May 12, 2008

Jabberwocky (in Sanskrit)

Thus have I heard:

American Oriental Society

PROGRAM OF THE 211th MEETING

...
Papers in Memory of Daniel H. H. Ingalls:

89.
Ashok Aklujkar, University of British Columbia

Using Lewis Carroll to Fill a Gap in Palace Walls: Jabberwocky in Sanskrit.

Not a joke; the paper translates Carroll. And then explains his choices in Sanskrit. Brillig, ain't it?

I..E. : Troy



Prof. Calvert Watkins, a linguist at Harvard, was examining some dry documents in an extinct language of ancient Anatolia when he came upon a string of words that filled him with excitement. Translated, the words said: When they came from steep Wilusa. . . .

At a Symposium held at Bryn Mawr College in October 1984 linguist Prof. Watkins suggests that "Steep Wilusa", a city mentioned on a Hittite tablet which was written in Luvian, could well be "Steep llios" of the lliad. "Priya-Muwas" sounds very much like "Priamos". The Luvian "Aleksandus" may well be "Aleksandros", the second name of the Trojan prince Paris.

To read more, See the LINE OF SONG PROVIDES A CLUE ON ANCIENT TROY By COLIN CAMPBELL (Special to The New York Times); National Desk, January 28, 1985.

Mlecch (Like it Sounds?)

It is adopted as a root: mlecchayati DhatupaTha. xxxii , 120)

>>From a much older level, perhaps is the term for
‘non-Sanskrit speaking outsider/foreigner’: Mleccha,
‘Indus people’ -> foreigner, unable to speak Vedic
Sanskrit (Cf. Påli Milakkhu, Babylonian Melua).
Even the term Yavana must be old, perhaps a loan
word via some language of Asia Minor and Iran, since
Iōn <- *iaFōn- is of the level of archaic Greek. All of
this once again points to early Western contacts, p42,
such as visible in the word for ‘wheat'...<<

and, from another Witzel piece, The Languages of Harappa:

>>The word melua is of special interest. It occurs as a verb in a different form
(mlecha-ti) in Vedic only in ŚB 3.2.1, an eastern text of N. Bihar where it indicates 'to speak
in barbarian fashion'. But it has a form closer to Melua in Middle Indian (MIA): Pali, the
church language of S. Buddhism which originated as a western N. Indian dialect (roughly,
between Mathura, Gujarat and the Vindhya) has milakkha, milakkhu. Other forms, closer
to ŚB mleccha are found in mod. Sindhi, Panjabi, Kashmiri, W. Pahari. It seems that, just as
in other cases mentioned above, the original local form *m(e)lu was preserved only in the
South (> Pali), while the North has *mlecch. The meaning of Mleccha must have evolved
from 'self-designation' > 'name of foreigners', cf. those of the Franks > Arab Farinjī
'foreigner.' Its introduction into Vedic must have begun in Melua, in Baluchistan-Sindh,
long before surfacing in eastern North India in Middle/Late Vedic as Mleccha (for details,
see Witzel 1999 a,b)<<

On a listserve:

Date: Sat, 8 Jan 2000 14:26:12 PST
Reply-To: Indology <[log in to unmask]>
Sender: Indology Mailing List <[log in to unmask]>
Comments: To: [log in to unmask]
From: "N. Ganesan" <[log in to unmask]>
Subject: mleccha
Comments: To: [log in to unmask]
Content-Type: text/plain; format=flowed

Prof. Witzel, Substrates in OIA, EJVS, 1999 <<< The word meluHHa is of special interest. It occurs as a verb in a different form (mlecha-) in Vedic only in ZB 3.2.1, an eastern text of N. Bihar where it indicates 'to speak in barbarian fashion'. But it has a form closer to meluHHa in Middle Indian (MIA): Pali, the church language of S. Buddhism which originated as a western N. Indian dialect (roughly, between Mathura, Gujarat and the Vindhya) has milakkha, milakkhu. Other forms, closer to ZB mleccha are found in MIA *mliccha > Sindhi milis, Panjabi milech, malech, Kashmiri bri.c.hun 'weep, lament' (< *mrech-, with the common r/l interchange of IA), W. Pahari mel±.c.h 'dirty'. It seems that, just as in other cases mentioned above, the original local form *m(e)luH (i.e. m(e)lukh in IA pronunciation, cf. E. Iranian bAxdhI 'Bactria' > AV *bahli-ka, balhi-ka) was preserved only in the South (Gujarat? > Pali), while the North (Panjab, Kashmir, even ZB and Bengal) has *mlecch. The sound shift from -HH-/-kh- > -cch- is unexplained; it may have been modeled on similar correspondences in MIA (Skt. akSi 'eye' ~ MIA akkhi, acchi; kSetra 'field' ~ MIA khetta, chetta, etc.) >>> Prof. Parpola derives Meluhha, mentioned in Sumerian tablets, as Dravidian (Deciphering the Indus script, 1994). He connects Meluhha with tamil "mElakam". Intervocalical -k- often becomes a h-type sound. For example, take the sangam division of life into "pu.ram" (exterior) and "akam" (interior), - "akam" is pronounced as "aham". Is "Meluhha" a Sumerian rendering of the word something like "melakam"?

from N. Ganesan, on the Indology archive. I don't see whether this was answered.

And finally, here is how to use the word in contemporary discussion effectively:

>>Am Don, 05 Apr 2001 schrieb Subrahmanya S.:

> I don't know how many people have looked yet at Shrikant Talageri's long and
> devastating analysis of Michael Witzel's _Rigvedic: poets, chieftians andn
> politics. (http://www.voi.org/books/rig/ch9.htm)
> It shouldn't be overlooked.

It _should be_ overlooked, if only because Talageri's complaint that
Witzel has not read him is now, after Witzel's last review, evidently
pointless - if it were not already so before.

Perhaps you can show us, on the basis of Witzel's recent text, why we
should dismiss his criticism of Talageri? That would be far more
constructive than referring to rambling internet diatribes by persons
who hold up other persons of proven mendaciousness as authorities.

> Witzels's admits that his article is closely linked to earlier
> 19th century orientalists like Oldenberg

Perhaps because Oldenberg has done good work? Have you thought of that
possibility? Even if Oldenberg was a mleccha and not a modern
rightwing Hindu jingoist or sympathiser?<<

shaman

I found a paragraph in a Wiki article on "shaman" quite enjoyable.

There, we are told that Alice Kehoe in "Shamans and Religion: An Anthropological Exploration in Critical Thinking" is highly critical of the term 'shamanism', and particularly peeved with Mircea Eliade's work of the troublesome name. That particular description was mediocre. But what follows, as a description of Kehoe's possible reasons, is quite masterful:

>>Eliade, being a philosopher and historian of religions rather than an anthropologist, had never done any field work or made any direct contact with 'shamans' or cultures practicing 'shamanism', though he did spend four years studying at the University of Calcutta in India where he received his doctorate based on his Yoga thesis and was acquainted with Mahatma Gandhi.
<<

I have taken the liberty of trimming some some flab, though I left the scare quotes in the original--a sign of its not being my own. It is the last parting shot I think indicative of skilled marksmanship.

Here is the online etymological dictionary:

shaman: 1698, "priest of the Ural-Altaic peoples," probably via Ger. Schamane, from Rus. shaman, from Tungus shaman, which is perhaps from Chinese sha men "Buddhist monk," from Prakrit samaya-, from Skt. sramana-s "Buddhist ascetic."

Of course much more to be said on that front, material which Eliade includes, to his credit, with footnotes: one must appreciate the good, for there is good in all of us, even those who write on Shamanism, while hanging out in Calcutta, having torrid affairs (perhaps because of having torrid affairs), and then meeting only one decidedly peculiar sramana while you are at it.

Here is the Digital Dictionary of Buddhism, taking less chances:

沙門
[Pronunciations]
[py] shāmén
[wg] sha-men
[hg] 사문
[mc] samun
[mr] samun
[kk] シャモン
[hb] shamon
[qn] sa môn

Meanings
[Basic Meaning:] śramaṇa

Senses:
# Transliteration of the Sanskrit, meaning 'a Buddhist monk' (or nun). A wanderer (Pali samaṇa; Tib. dge sbyong). A world-renunciant religious practitioner striving for liberation. Originally in India, śramaṇa was a general term for a person who had shaved his head, renounced his worldly status and possessions and who trained his mind and body in the attempt to stop evil activities and strive for the good. It originally referred to non-Buddhist practitioners such as the Jains who based their beliefs on the Vedas and Upanishads. Translated into Chinese with such terms as 息, 息心, 靜志, 淨志, 乏道, 貧道, 動息, 功勞, 勤息, 淨志, 貧道 etc. Also transliterated as 桑門; 娑門; 喪門; 沙門那; 舍羅磨拏; 沙迦懣曩; 室摩那拏, 舍囉摩拏. 〔長阿含經、 T 1.107a〕 [cmuller ; source(s): Soothill,YBh-Ind]
# (1) Ascetics of all kinds; "the Sarmanai, or Samanaioi, or Germanai of the Greeks, perhaps identical also with the Tungusian Saman or Shaman." (Eitel) (2) Buddhist monks "who 'have left their families and quitted the afflictions,' the Semnoi of the Greeks." (Eitel) "He must keep well the Truth, guard well every uprising (of desire), be uncontaminated by outward attractions, be merciful to all and impure to none, be not elated to joy nor harrowed by distress, and able to bear whatever may come." The Sanskrit root is śram, to make effort; exert oneself, do austerities. [cmuller ; source(s): Soothill]

[Dictionary References]

Zengaku daijiten (Komazawa U.)477a

Iwanami Bukkyō jiten387

A Glossary of Zen Terms (Inagaki)330

Japanese-English Buddhist Dictionary (Daitō shuppansha)271a/298

Japanese-English Zen Buddhist Dictionary (Yokoi)625

Bukkyōgo daijiten (Nakamura)601a

Fo Guang Dictionary2972

Ding Fubao

Buddhist Chinese-Sanskrit Dictionary (Hirakawa)0711

Bukkyō daijiten (Mochizuki)(v.1-6)2180c,3019a,4280a

Bukkyō daijiten (Oda)811-1*1480-2-10

Sanskrit-Tibetan Index for the Yogâcārabhūmi-śāstra (Yokoyama and Hirosawa)

And here is an item clutched from cyberspace, in the midst of a discussion on meso-american studies. This one is worth the read:

>>

Date: Thu, 12 Nov 1998 09:02:24 EST
Reply-To: Harri J Kettunen <[log in to unmask]>
Sender: Pre-Columbian History <[log in to unmask]>
From: Harri J Kettunen <[log in to unmask]>
Subject: Re: Ma: Xamanism
Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=ISO-8859-1
Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=ISO-8859-1

----------------------------Original message---------------------------- ------------------ A comment on the discussion of the term 'shamanism' (Robert Carlsen =26 al.): The word 'shaman' has its roots in the Evenki (formerly Tungus) language spoken presently by some 10 000 native speakers (out of the total of 30 000 Evenkis) living in the area extending from the northern tip of the lake Baikal to the area around the fork of the rivers Lena and Aldan in the Eastern end of the Middle Siberian highlands (Sibirskoye ploskogorye) and all the way to the Indigirska plains (Indigirskaya nizmennost) further to the north-east. From the Evenki 'sama:n'/ 'shama:n'/ 'hama:n' the word was introduced first to Russian in the second half of the 17th century by an Old-Believer highpriest Avvakum, who was living in exile among the Evenkis, and made the first written account of the Evenki s(h)amans (the unvoiced alveolar fricative /s/ has an unvoiced postalveolar fricative (=22sh=22) as a variant in the Southern Evenki, from where the word was supposedly borrowed to Russian). It is noteworthy that Avvakum spoke only of Evenki shamans, and not of shamanISM. From the Evenki source the word was introduced to Russian in the form 'shaman', and the fenomenon as 'shamanstvo' (later also 'shamanism', but this form was probably re-borrowed from English). >From Russian the word(s) found its way to German (Schamane, Schamanismus), and consequently to all the other languages using a 'derivative' of this term. In English the first written source is Adam Brand's =22Journal of the Embassy From Muscovy to China Over Land=22 (1698), and the two words have undergone the following changes in the English language through time: schamane-schaman-schuman-shaman, and: schamanism-shahmanism-shamanism (the original meaning of the Russian word 'shamanstvo' is closer to the idea of =22shamanhood=22 =5Bsee below for a comment on this matter=5D). Furthermore,= the Evenki/Tungus (Tungusic) source of the word is under investigation at the moment, and there might be substantial evidence to grant the origin to Nivkhi (Nivhi/Gilgit) language of the Sahalin Island - especially because in Evenki there seems to be no real etymology for the word, but in the Nivkhi the word for shaman (c'am=5Bng=5D) also stands for 'eagle' (Prof. Janhunen =5Bsee below=5D will be talking about these matters in the = Conference of Shamanism in Tampere next January, if interested). The concept 'shamanism' has, however, undergone a terminological inflation both in popular writings, and in scholarly texts. In quite a few writings the concept 'shamanism' encompasses phenomena and personae such as African soul-possession cults or Mr. Jim Morrison. According to the Swedish academician and a researcher of religions (and e.g. shamanism), =8Fke Hultkranz =22There has, for a long period of time, prevailed a considerable confusion with the term 'shamanism'. Its content and meaning have been obscured. This is even more so regrettable because it is one of the most utilized terms in the religion(s) studies, folkloristics, and ethnology, and because we can hardly abandon the term.=22 The word/term/concept 'shamanism' has a twofold load on its back: in the first place, it contains a troublesome Greek-originated suffix '-ism', which implies (in many cases) institutionalized and dogmatic concepts and ideologies (such as communism, despotism, buddhism, Darwinism, Thompsonism?, etc.)=3B in the second place, it carries a burden of being a term used by the European (colonialist) anthropologists since the very beginning of ethnology and anthropology. Many native peoples (academic included) around the world shun the term for this reason, and some, like professor (of Religion Studies/ Univ. of California at Santa Barbara) In=82s M. Talamantez call it 'white shamanism', referring to the anthropologists who write about the ritual practices of the Native Americans as if they were all the way shamanistic: =22First they took our language and raped our land, and now they tell us HOW we believe=3B and that our Medicinemen are shamans.=22 (Sakim: this calls for a comment..) According to some researchers of Siberian shamanism (e.g. Anna-Leena Siikala) we should restrict the use of the term shamanism to the cradle of shamanism, Siberia, only. The shamanism encountered in the areas, where Tungusic languages (e.g. Evenki) are spoken, resembles the shamanic/ shamanistic practices carried out by other Siberian tribes, even though they have another term for the shaman (it is noteworthy that none of these languages have a concept for 'shamanism'). A cognate of Evenki 'sama:n'/ 'shama:n'/ 'hama:n' can be found in the following (Mandchu-)Tungusic languages: Negidal (sama:n), Lamut (hama:n), Udege and Oroch (sama=5Bn-=5D), Nanay (saman), Ulcha (sama=5Bn=5D), Orok (sama=5Bn-=5D), and Mandchu (sama/saman).In other areas the word for 'shaman' is different but the practices of shamans have a lot in common. In Mongol (belonging to the same family of languages =5BAltaic=5D as Tungusic and Turkic subfamilies = =5Bwith Korean as a probable =22external member=22=5D) the word for shaman is = 'b=94ge' (((the 'hen scratches' you probably get with my Scandinavian Keys are =94 = =5Bo with dots=5D, and =5Bin the following example=5D =81 =5Bu with dots=5D))), = which in Turkish becomes b=81g=81 (a wise person, magician). According to professor (of Eastern Asian Languages and Cultures/ Univ. of Helsinki) Juha Janhunen there is substantial evidence also for the noticeable age of shamaness' (female shaman's) appearance in Siberia, since in all of the Mongol languages there is a term which is exclusive for shamaness's (in Mongol 'idu7an' and in Buryat 'udagang' =5B/7/ stands here and in the following examples for velar fricative, and /ng/ cluster for velar nasal (I don't have my IPA on Pine yet)=5D). This term has, furthermore, been loaned to Yakut ('uda7an'), Evenki (udugan), Nedigal (odogan), and Lamut (udugan). Also in the Uralic languages there is no common term for a shaman: e.g. in Lapp it is 'noaiddi', and in Finnish 'tiet=84j=84' (tietaja - /a/ with = dots). It is interesting to notice that the Lapp 'noaiddi' (shaman) becomes 'noita' (witch) in Finnish with the original '=2Atietaja' meaning =22the one who knows=22 or =22the knower=22 (roots: 'tie' =5Broad, way, passage, = means=5D, and 'tieto' =5Bknowledge, intelligence, information=5D). Also many Far-Eastern Siberian tribes have an original term for a shaman and for shamanic practices and equipment. The Ainus of Sakhalin and Hokkaido Islands (in Russia and Japan, respectively) have 'tusu-kur' and 'tusu-menoko' for shamans and shamaness's (respectively). The Yukagir words for a shaman ('alma=5B-=5D'/'olma=5Bng=5D'/'wolme=5Bng=5D') are also autochtonous. The = terminology connected to shamanism of the Koryaks living in the upper course of Kolyma and Buyunda rivers probably (according to Janhunen) belongs to the same terminology as the one of the Inuits (around the Arcticum): in Koryak the shaman is 'angang=2Al7on' (/=2A/ for central open =5Bmid=5D vowel), in Nauka= Yupik 'angalkuq', in the Bering area Inuit 'angatqoq', and in the Greenland =22Eskimo=22 'an-gakkoq'. Even though we can't be sure who gave and who received the terminology, the appearance of common terminology from the Bering Strait all the way to Greenland speaks for the old age of the word. According to Janhunen the oldest protolanguages in Siberia with original vocabulary/terminology for shamanic practices and personae are the following: Proto-Tungus, Proto-Yenisei, Proto-Samoyed, and probably also Proto-Ob-Ugrian. The comparative analysis of the lexicon also gives evidence of early connections between e.g. Turkish and Mongolian=3B Yenisei and Samoyed=3B Evenki, Nivkh, and Ainu, and Mongolian. To conclude, although shamanic terminology varies from area to area in Siberia, shamanism and shamans are to be found all around in the area.<<

Kalmyk Buddhism



Just met an entertaining and widely read scholar, Michael Khodarkovsky, apparently with the distinction of being the only scholar to publish a book in English on Kalmyk Buddhism. Not sure which of the two books listed below he had expressly in mind, but both seem relevant:

Where Two Worlds Met: The Russian State and the Kalmyk Nomads, 1600-1771 (Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, 1992)

Of Religion and Empire: Missions, Conversion and Tolerance in Tsarist Russia, editor with Robert Geraci (Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, 2001).

Other books from him include:

Russia's Steppe Frontier: The Making of a Colonial Empire, 1500-1800 (Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press, 2002).

Imperial Visions, Policies and Impacts: Russian and Ottoman Empires Compared, 1500-1800 (current project)


While fumbling in conversation for something that I had just perused oestensibly with something to do with Russian Buddhist, I didn't realize that the book I was fumbling for, Buddha's Little Finger by Victor Pelevin, is indeed related to the topic, but only insofar as the author is Russian, and a Buddhist, a conjunction I think irrelevant now to Khodarkovsky's work. Still, a fun read I think. (The 'Buddhism' is either very deep, an orienting condition in the novel, or it functions like it does in the US: designed to be introduced in conversations when engaged in by those with sufficient self reflectiveness to realize their own innanities, but without the ability to withdraw or appreciate silence, expressive of the same. Buddhist principles, I mean: which are often so trotted out by Buddhist meditators. That's what principles are good for. For when you have to talk to the yo-yo on the mat next to you, at the vegan lunch after...

Here is something to read as one anticipates some weather more reminiscent of spring:


The Buddhist hordes of Kalmykia

* Lawrence Booth
* The Guardian,
* Tuesday September 19 2006
* Article history

About this article
Close
This article appeared in the Guardian on Tuesday September 19 2006 on p2 of the Comment & features section. It was last updated at 01:03 on September 19 2006.
Chess and Buddhism may seem, to the uninitiated, to have nothing in common beyond the fact that both require ferocious concentration and are practised by serious-looking men in milk-bottle specs.

Yet on Thursday the connection will be strengthened when the opening ceremony of a series of matches between Veselin Topalov and Vladimir Kramnik, the title holders of international chess's two rival federations, is held in Elista, a small town roughly halfway between the Black Sea and the Caspian in the south-west Russian state of Kalmykia. And Kalmykia, for those who have missed the pre-match hype, is Europe's only Buddhist nation. Or, to be more precise, its only Buddhist self-governing republic.

The history behind the Dalai Lama's spiritual presence in this unheralded corner of the continent goes back to Genghis Khan and his - theoretically Buddhist - hordes, descendants of whom settled in present-day Kalmykia in the early 17th century. A western journalist who visited nearly 400 years later described the place as "more a state of mind", but it is a miracle that even that exists. Because, like "the meek" in the Life of Brian scene which sends up the Sermon on the Mount, the Kalmyks, who make up just over half the population of 292,000, have had a hell of a time.

They have been abolished by Catherine the Great, butchered by Bolsheviks, invaded by Nazis, and exiled by Stalin before being allowed to return to their country by Khrushchev in 1957. By then, there were fewer than 70,000 Kalmyks left, and no Buddhist temples at all. And their mood was not helped when vast swathes of their country were reduced to desert by the sharp hooves of sheep imported from the nearby Caucasus mountains.

But spiritual sustenance arrived in the form of Erdne Ombadykow, a Philadelphian of Kalmyk origin who was sent to India by his family as a boy and in 1979 was spotted by the Dalai Lama , who believed him to be the reincarnation of the Buddhist saint Tilopa. Now known as Telo Rinpoche - "precious one" - Ombadykow visited Kalmykia in 1992 and, with the Dalai's blessing, has since become the country's spiritual leader. It doesn't seem to bother the locals too much that he forsook the life of a monk three years later to start a family. He is a figurehead, and that, it seems, is enough.

The Kalmykian president Kirsan Nikolayevich Ilyumzhinov, who doubles up as the president of Fide, the World Chess Federation, takes his religion just as seriously and recently decorated Elista with Europe's largest Buddhist temple, which opened last December. That said, the exact nature of Ilyumzhinov's spirituality defies orthodoxy. "Irrespective of what I tell people," he said in 1995, "I give them instructions on a subconscious level. I am creating around the republic a kind of extrasensory field." He also claims to have spent time with aliens, although this is not thought to be a slur on Topalov and Kramnik. All in all, it seems a good job that the Dalai Lama is an open-minded man.

Wheee

Tang Bronze


Tang gilded bronze Buddha;

Height: 19.4 cm (7 in)

For personal reference, as poet Hart Crane is said to have possessed a Tang bronze seated Buddha, and had no idea what they might look like.

Not My Mother-In-Law

Saturday, May 10, 2008

Hobbits in Kentucky (For Mandy)



Following up on a recent conversation, and on a promise made in an earlier post (Hobbitry), here is an excerpt from Davenport's essay 'Hobbitry'.Davenport (1927-2005) was a singular critic, not unlike hobbits himself, except perhaps for his practice of leaving all doors and windows open for the bugs to crawl, fly or skip on through the house. That and his diet.






Davenport recalls a conversation with Allen Barnett, a historian who retired from 30 years as head of the department at Woodbury Forest to his home in Shelbyville, Kentucky:

I began plying questions as soon as I knew that I was talking to a man who had been at Oxford as a classmate of Ronald Tolkien's. He was a history teacher, Allen Barnett. He had never read The Hobbit or The Lord of the Rings. Indeed, he was astonished and pleased to know that his friend of so many years ago had made a name for himself as a writer.
"Imagine that! You know, he used to have the most extraordinary interest in the people here in Kentucky. He could never get enough of my tales of Kentucky folk. He used to make me repeat family names like Barefoot and Boffin and Baggins and good country names like that."
And out the window I could see tobacco barns. The charming anachronism of the hobbits' pipes suddenly made sense in a new way...



"Practically all the names of Tolkien's hobbits are listed in my Lexington phone book, and those that aren't can be found over in Shelbyville. Like as not, they grow and cure pipe-weed for a living. Talk with them, and their turns of phrase are pure hobbit: 'I hear tell,' 'right agin,' 'so Mr. Frodo is his first and second cousin, once removed either way,' 'this very month as is.' These are English locutions, of course, but ones that are heard oftener now in Kentucky than in England.

"I despaired of trying to tell Barnett what his talk of Kentucky folk became in Tolkien's imagination. I urged him to read The Lord of the Rings but as our paths have never crossed again, I don't know that he did. Nor if he knew that he created by an Oxford fire and in walks along the Cherwell and Isis the Bagginses, Boffins, Tooks, Brandybucks, Grubbs, Burrowses, Goodbodies, and Proudfoots (or Proudfeet, as a branch of the family will have it) who were, we are told, the special study of Gandalf the Grey, the only wizard who was interested in their bashful and countrified ways."

The essay can be found in the New York Times, and also included in the collection "The Geography of the Imagination," a volume of Davenport's in which he conceives of his own practice in ways that has impacted my own work greatly. His "The Anthropology of Table Manners" is wicked fun.

Sunday, May 4, 2008

How to Combine Two of Indology's Favorite Past-times


(or: Why my wife does not let me study anything but philosophy)



the two that are often coupled: horses and sex, of course.

Snakes and Ladders



This late 18th century snakes and ladders board was then known as the game of Heaven and Hell (Jnana Bagi).The longest ladder reaches from square 17 'Compassionate Love' to 69 'The World of the Absolute'. Courtesy of the Wellcome Library.


As long as three hundred years ago, Indian children were slithering down snakes, who represented vices, and scaling the ladders of virtue. One board in the Library is about 18 inches square, divided into eight rows and nine columns, its ladders in the traditional Jain colours of red and yellow. Just as countless children today have their own set, so would countless Indian children; there would have been thousands of copies of it floating about.
he game of Snakes and Ladders originated in India and there are Hindu, Muslim and Jain versions of the game.

The Jains called their version 'gyanbazi' or 'gyanbaji' which means 'Game of Knowledge'. Jains are particularly fond of playing this game during periods of fasting when the layout of the game means that they have the opportunity to study Jain concepts of morality and ethics.


Game of Snakes & Ladders, 19th century. Museum no. CIRC.324-1972 (click image for larger version)

Tropical Debates


As an exercise in the degree to which it is still possible to write historical accounts in the rhetorical tradition of the ancients (and no, I am not speaking of Cicero, though the right tenor will suggest itself in the article below), I highly recommend this piece.
I can see using this as a primer for showing students the turns of speech (the ornaments, to speak in the tradition), that can be employed. (Such training is invaluable for reading and interpreting texts...I do not know whether to be encouraged by its continuing vitality, or dismayed).



The great debator who saved the Buddha Sasana
The Lakehouse 20th September 2001
[...]

The foreign exploiters such as the Portuguese, the Dutch and the
English invaded this blessed land and used devious means to extort
its essence and turn their countries into heavens and keep its people
under bondage. This Buddhist country can be governed not by the use
of arms but by breaking the confidence between the layman and the
Buddhist monk reported the English officers who were in charge of the
administration here, to the British rulers abroad. In order to
achieve this objective missionary education and the Christian
doctrine were propagated while government jobs were limited only to
Christians.

Dialectician reborn

This crafty project was so successful that the Christian scholar,
James D. Alwis was bold enough to write in his introduction to the
Sidat Sangarava that Buddhism were end by the end of the 19th
century. From this alone the pitiable plight that the Sinhala
Buddhist faced at that time can be guaged. Under these conditions at
the first half of the 19th century in order to establish a Buddhist
revival after awakening the Buddhists who were in a deep slumber it
was essential to have many Bhikkhu-dialecticians with debating skill,
knowledge of the doctrine and philosophy and self-reliance and
fearlessness. But instead of these many Bhikkhus, one monk arose. It
was the great debater Vadibhasimha Gunananda from Mohottivatte
(Migettuwatte)at Balapitiya in South Sri Lanka. He was born imbued
with all the qualities of a great Vadibhasimha and it was as if the
great dialectician Nagasena was reborn.

It is mentioned that at that time rubbing shoulders with the
missionaries who condemned Buddhism even the number of discourses he
made all over the island exceeded four thousand. Besides these he
held great public debates at Waragoda, Udammita, Gampola, Baddegama
and Panadura. The Panadura debate was a very strongly decisive one.
Although engaged in the other debates without the assistance of
anybody, he obtained the assistance of several great pandit monks who
were learned and well versed in the doctrine and discipline. They
were Hikkaduve Sri Sumangala, Panadura Sri Gunaratana, Weligama Sri
Sumangala, Randombe Dhammalankara, and Waskaduve Sri Subhuti. If the
truth of Buddhism was not logically proved that day by holding the
Panadura Great Debate, Buddhism would have certainly been crippled.

The value of this debate lay not merely on the victory of Buddhists
alone. It was the establishment of a Buddhist revival island-wide and
the acceptance of the value and truth of Buddhism worldwide.

It was because of this great debate that Col. Olcott came to Sri
Lanka with Madame Blavatsky on May 17 1880, embraced Buddhism and
began the great campaign to revive Buddhism in Sri Lanka.

Buddhist schools

This historic great debate opened the road for the birth of Buddhist
schools, establishment of Pirivenas, starting of various societies
for the development of the Sasana, making it possible for learned men
to arise, publication of Buddhist literature, and making it possible
for the protection and fostering of the Sinhala nation and the
Buddhist culture.

The Panadura debate began on 26th August 1872. Vidyodaya Pirivena was
established after four months from this date, viz: December 1872.
Ven. Mohottiwatte thera frequently preached sermons at the site of
the Vidyodaya Pirivena, and helped to collect funds and build up the
Pirivena. This is stated in the column, 'Things to know' published by
Anagarika Dharmapala.

Ananda College, Colombo was established 14 years after the Panadura
debate. When they tried to name it Gunananda Vidyalaya, it was Ven.
Mohottiwatte who suggested that it should rather be called Ananda
College. "It is a great honour for Buddhism for the College to be
named after the chief attendant of the Buddha, and my name is also
embodied in it"; said the venerable thera. Thus it was named Ananda
College.

At that time there were 905 schools for about 3 lakhs of Catholics,
whereas there were only 4 schools for about 20 lakhs of Buddhists. As
a result of the Panadura debate about 142 Buddhist schools were
started between 1800 and 1900.

Facts

According to these facts it is evident that it was Ven. Mohoittiwatte
Gunananda Maha Thera who started the great battle to obtain the
national and religious rights by a 'lion's roar' which dispelled the
fright which was there in an era when people were afraid ever to call
themselves Buddhists. If he did not pursue that battle dedicating his
life it would certainly have led to the disappearance of Buddhism as
predicted by James D'Alwis.

Therefore it is no small wonder that present day historians mention
that Ven. Mohottiwatte Vadibhasinha was the pioneer in the national
and religious revival of the Colombo era, and that one should not
hesitate to name the Colombo era as the Gunananda era and that it is
the duty of unbiased critics to name the real facts as the truth.

The Editor of 'Ceylon Times' John Cooper wrote a detailed account of
the Panadura debate held on 26th August, 1872. In that report it is
mentioned thus:

"It had been agreed to commence the debate at 8 a.m. Long before the
appointed time well dressed natives began to pour in streams to the
open ground facing the building where the debaters would meet. At 7
a.m. the whole ground was one mass of heads. Villagers from every
district had come there. The Colombo district was represented by a
few young men attired in silk who seemed to be intelligent. They were
all ready to sacrifice everything they had for the sake of Ven.
Mohottiwatte Thera who was the powerful guardian of Buddhism".

Debate building

"The building in which the debate was held was a delightful thatched
building. There was a high platform inside it. On this platform which
was divided into two, on one side seated there were Rev. David de
Silva, Clergyman and his colleagues and on the other side Ven.
Mohottiwatte and about 200 monks. The cause for the Panadura
controversy was a sermon preached by Rev. David de Silva on 12th
June, 1872. There the non-soul theory of the Buddha was mentioned. On
the 19th of that month itself, Buddhists denounced that statement
saying it was a falsehood".

During the whole of the period of this debate, among the audience was
Rev. S. Langdon, clergyman. He wrote a letter to the Wesleyan
Methodist Mission Society detailing the points of the debate. There
it is mentioned as follows:

Oratorical skill

"When Ven. Mohottiwatte arose from his seat to open the sermon I was
reminded of certain speakers of our country. He was fully aware of
his power to sway the people due to his oratorical skill. His voice
tamed the dissentients. The voice which was clear, ebbs and flows in
various ways. His gestures are pleasing and all the more striking due
to his long yellow robe. Because of his power to sway the audience he
seemed to be a born orator".

"This wonderful debate came to an end peacefully. People who stood
far away from the speaker almost not to hear him gave shouts
of 'Sadhu'. Besides this there was no other disturbance or hullabaloo
at the debate. This was the most wonderful thing. I would like to
question whether it is possible to conduct a debate of this nature in
Europe free from riots and disturbances".

The learned critics of later times mentioned that the birth of Ven.
Gunananda Thera was similar to the appearance of Ven. Nagasena Thera
to dispel the misgivings of King Milinda in the past. Pandit
Batuvantudave has mentioned that if he did not appear at that time
the Sinhala nation and Buddhism would have been effaced forever.

Death of a debater

Ven. Seenigama Dheerakkhandha Maha Thera who was the incumbent of the
Dipaduttarama Vihara at Kotahena was Ven. Gunananda's uncle. He who
was ordained at the feet of his uncle did an incomparable service to
the sasana and the nation passed away on September 21, 1890 at the
age of 67 years. With the setting of the Gunananda sun which
dispelled the darkness of the hereties thousands of people flocked
towards Dipaduttaramaya. The body was covered in a yellow silk robe
and was kept in a glass casket and exposed to public veneration for
about a week. Thereafter the funeral procession headed by Ven.
Hikkaduve Siri Sumangala reached Model Farm Road where the Nayaka
Thera was cremated.

Commemoration meetings are held at this time at Abhinavaramaya,
Mohottivatta, Balapitiya, Dipaduttaramaya, Kotahena and at various
places in Panadura. May the Ven. Gunananda realise the bliss of
Buddhahood at the end of his journey in Samsara.

The Khazar Polemic


In light of the recent post on debates between Jesuits and Buddhists at the court of the Mongols, and a recent question from Lisa as to whether I could recommend any book capable of sustaining the moods of Calvino’s Invisible Cities, I think the following is appropriate.
I owe the reference to my brother, who continues to keep me alive to the possibilities in literature.

…And so it was that a Moslem, a Jewish, and a Christian divine—a dervish, a rabbi, and a monk---were to be found at the khagan’s summer residence. Each received a knife made of salt as a gift from the kaghan, and they began their debate. The sages’ viewpoints, their contest based on the tenets of their three different faiths, the characters involved in, and the outcome of the “Khazar polemic” aroused keen interest and strongly conflicting opinions about the event and its consequences, the victors and the vanquished, and through the centuries they became the subject of repeated debate in Hebrew, Christian and Moslem circles; all this continues to the present, although the Khazars have long since ceased to exist. (p4, Dictionary of the Khazars by Milorad Pavic).


I recommend the Dictionary of the Khazars to all; especially the female version, available as such, at all good booksellers.


In the spirit of the novel, I thought including here the entries found under “khazar polemic” is appropriate.



KHAZAR POLEMIC (Jewish Sources)
Hebrew sources cite this as the key event in the Khazar's conversion to Judaism. Since accounts of the event are scarce and contradictory, the exact date of the polemic is unknown, and the time of Judaization is confused with the moment when the three dream interpreters visited the Khazar Capital. The earliest preserved account, dating from the 10th century, is the correspondence between the Khazar Kaghan Joseph (who already practiced Judaism) and Hasdai Ibn Shaprut, the minister of the caliph in Cordoba. Hasdai was a Jew and had asked the kaghan to describe the circumstances under which the Khazars had adopted the Jewish faith. According to this correspondence, it all took place under the reign of Kaghan Bulan, and the invitation of an angel, right after the capture of Ardabil (around 731). It was then, if this source is to be believed, that a debate on religions was conducted the the court of the Khazar kaghan. Since the Jewish envoy bested the Greek and Arab representatives, the Khazars adopted Judaism under Kaghan Bulan's successor, Obadiah. The second source is a fragment of a Jewish letter found in 1912 in Cambridge, England. It comes from a manuscript belonging to a the Cairo Synagogue (ed. Schechter). The letter was written in approximately 950 by a Jew of Khazar origin to Minister Shaprut, as a supplement to Kaghan Bulan's letter to the same personage at the court of Cordoba. This source contends that the Judaization of the Khazars took place before the polemic and that happened as follows:
A non-practicing Jew returned from war a hero and became the Khazar kaghan. His wife and her father expected that he would now accept the faith of his forefathers, but he himself said nothing. The turning point (according to Daubmannus) came one evening when the kaghan's wife said to him:
Beneath the heavenly equator in the valleys where the sweet and saline dew meet, there grows a huge poisonous fungus, and the tasty little edible mushrooms on its cap transform its contaminated blood into sweetness. The deer like to invigorate their masculine strength by nibbling these mushrooms. But if they are careless and bite down too deep, the ingest some of the big poisonous fungus along with the little mushrooms, and then they die.
Every evening, when I kiss my beloved, I think: It is only natural that one day I will bite down to deep . . . .
Upon hearing these words, the kaghan began practicing Judaism. All this transpired before the polemic, which, according to this source, took place during the reign of the Byzantine Emperor Leo III (717-740). After the polemic, Judaism became fully established among the Khazars and neighboring peoples during the reign of Kaghan Sabriel, who is one and the same person with Kaghan Obadiah, because (according to Daubmannus) he was called Sabriel during the even years and Obadiah during the odd years of his rule.
The most exhaustive Hebrew source on the Khazar polemic is also the most important, although it is of a later date. This is the book Al Khazari by Judah Halevi, the famous poet and chronicler of the Khazar polemic. He says that the polemic and the Khazar's conversion to the Jewish faith took place four centuries before the writing of his book, which would take place in the year 740. Finally, there is Bacher, who found that the impact of the Khazars Judaization is reflected in midrash literature. The legends that told about the event especially flourished in the Crimea, the Taman peninsula, and Tamatarkha, known as a Jewish city in the Khazar Empire.
Briefly, the event that was these sources' object of interest took place in the following way. In the summer capital of the kaghan, on the Black Sea, where they whitewashed the pears on their branches in the autumn and picked them fresh in the winter, three theologians were brought together: a Jewish rabbi, a Christian monk, and an Arab mullah. The kaghan informed them of his decision to convert, along with all his people, to the religion of the one theologian who gave the most satisfactory interpretation of the dream. An angel had appeared in the Khazar kaghan's dream and had said to him: "God is pleased by your intentions, but not by your deeds." The debate centered on these words and the Hebrew sources cited by Daubmannus describe the further course of events.
The Hebrew representative, Rabbi Isaac Sangari, said nothing at first, letting the other two, the Greek and the Arab, speak first. When it seemed that the kaghan was about to be swayed by the arguments of the Islamic representative, a Khazar princess by the name of Ateh joined in the discussion, admonishing the Arab in these words:
You are too wise when you speak to me. I watch the clouds drift and disappear behind the mountains and recognize them in fleeting thoughts. Tears sometimes trickle from them, but thin the brief hours when the clouds part I see a patch of clear sky with your face at the bottom, because it is only there to prevent me from seeing you as you are.
In reply, the mullah told the kaghan that he was not suggesting any kind of trickery to the Khazars, but, rather, he was suggesting a holy book, the Koran, because the Khazars did not have a the Holy Book: we have all learned to walk because we are made out of two lame legs, but you are still limping.
Princes Ateh the asked the Arab:
Every book has a father and a mother. There is the father, who dies impregnating the mother and who gives the child a name. and the there is the (book's) mother, who gives birth to the child, nurses it, and releases it into the world. Who is the mother of your Divine Book?
While the Arab was unable to answer this question, merely repeating that he was not suggesting trickery, he was suggesting the Holy Book, which is the messenger of love between God and man, Princess Ateh wound up the discussion with these words:
The Persian shah and the Greek emperor decided to exchange lavish gifts as a sign of piece. One gift-bearing legislation set out from Constantinople and the other from Isfhan. They met in Baghdad, where they learned that Nadir, the Persian shah, had been deposed, and that the Greek emperor had died. The two legislations were thus compelled to stay in Baghdad for a while, not knowing what to do with the treasures they were bearing, and fearing for their lives at every step. Seeing that bit by bit they were beginning to spend the treasure, they consulted on what to do. One of them said:
Whatever we do will be wrong. So let us each take one ducat and throw away the rest. . . ."
Which is what they did.
And what are we to do with our love, the love we send one another through our messengers? Will that too not remain in the hands of our messengers how take a ducat each and throw away the rest?
Having heard her words, the kaghan decided that the princess was right, and he rejected the Arab, saying, as quoted by Halevi:
"Why do Christians and Moslems, who have divided the inhabited part of the world between them, war against one another, each serving his own god of pure intent, by fasting and praying like monks and recluses? And they accomplish everything by killing, believing that this is the most devout way to bring them closer to God. They wage war, believing that heaven and eternal bliss will be their reward. Yet not both convictions can be accepted."
The kaghan reached the following conclusion:
"Your caliph has fleets of green-sailed ships and soldiers who chew on both sides. If we cross over to his religion, how many Khazars will be left? It is better for us, since convert we must, to join the Jews expelled by the Greeks, to join the poor and wandering who came here from Khorezm during the time of the Kitibia. The only army is what they can fit into a temple or onto a scroll."
The kaghan then turned to the Hebrew representative and asked him what he had to say about his religion. Rabbi Isaac Sangari replied that the Khazars did not have to convert to a new religion at all: they could keep their old one. His words caused general surprise, so the rabbi explained:
"You are not Khazars. You are Jews and should return to your rightful place: to the living God of your ancestors."
Only then did the rabbi begin to expound on his teachings to the kaghan. The days dripped like rain, and he talked and talked. First he told the kaghan about the seven things created before the creation of the world: the Torah, justice, Israel, the Throne of Glory, Jerusalem, and the Messiah, the son of David. Then he enumerated the most exalted things: the spirit of living God, air from the spirit, water from the wind, and fire from the water. And then he listed the three mothers: in the universe--air, water, and fire; in the soul--the chest, stomach, and head; in the year--moisture, frost, and heat. And the seven: 'beth', 'gimel', 'daleth', 'kaf', 'peh', 'resh', and 'tav', which are :in the universe--Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, the sun, Venus, Mercury, and the moon: in the soul--wisdom, wealth, power, life, mercy, progeny, and peace; and in the year--Sabbath, Thursday, Tuesday, Sunday, Friday, Wednesday, and Monday. . . .
And the kaghan began to understand the language spoken to Adam by God in heaven, and he said: "The wine I am pressing now will be drunk by others after me."
The kaghan's lengthy talks with Rabbi Isaac con be found in Judah Halevi's book on the Khazars, where the kaghan's conversion is described in the following way:
"Afterward, says the history of the Khazars, the Khazar kaghan departed with his vizier for the barren mountains by the sea. One night the came upon a cave where some Jews were celebrating Passover. They told them who they were, adopted their faith, were circumcised in the cave, and then returned home, eager to learn Jewish law. But they kept their conversion secret until the occasion presented itself for them to disclose the entire affair slowly to a handful of intimate friends. When the number of these friends increased, they made it public and persuaded the rest of the Khazars to adopt the Jewish faith. They sent for teachers and books from other countries and began studying the Torah . . . ."
In fact, the Khazars' conversion to Judaism evolved in two phases. The first came immediately after the Khazar victory over the Arabs at Ardabil, south of the Caucasus, in the year 730, when they used the plundered booty to build a temple modeled after the biblical one. In approximately 740, Judaism was adopted in certain extra forms. Kaghan Bulan invited rabbis from other countries to cultivate the Jewish faith among the Khazars. This early Judaism of the Khazars appears to have included the Khorezm people, who, when the Hursat Uprising was crushed, had fled in the sixties or eighties of the 8th century to the Khazar court, led by the rabbi.
The reform of this original Judaism was undertaken around the year 800, by Kaghan Obadiah, who began building synagogues and schools, where the Khazars learned about the Torah, Mishnah, Talmud, and Jewish liturgy: in other words, rabbinical Judaism was introduced.
In a way, the Arabs played a decisive role in the entire process. Leading figures in Khazar state adopted Judaism a time when Islamic influence had declined because of the power struggle between two dynasties in the Arab caliphate--the Omayyad and the Abbasid. Consequently, Masudi's claim that the king of the Khazars became a Jew during the reign of Caliph Harun Al-Rashid (786-809) checks out with the time of reform of Judaism undertaken by the Khazar Kaghan Obadiah.




KHAZAR POLEMIC (Islamic Sources)

Dimasci writes that during the polemic, which was to decide what confession the Khazar were to adopt, there was great unrest in the land. During the debate at the sumptuous court of the Khazar kaghan, the Khazar state started to walk. It was completely in motion. Nobody could meet anybody twice in the same place. A witness saw a crowd of people carrying huge rocks and asking: Where should we put them? They were the frontier stones of the Khazar Empire, the boundary markers. For Princess Ateh had ordered that boundary markers be carried, that they not touch the ground until it was decided what would happen to the Khazar faith. Exactly when this happened has not been established, but Al-Bakri notes that the Khazars adopted Islam before other religions, and that this was in the year 737 after Isa. Whether the conversion to Islam coincided with the polemic is a different question. It obviously. Thus, the year of the polemic remains unknown, but its essence is perfectly clear. Under strong pressure to adopt one of three religions--Islam, Christianity, or Judaism--the kaghan summoned the his court three learned men--a Jew who had been expelled from the caliphate, a Greek theologist from the university in Constantinople, and one of the Arab interpreters of the Koran. The Latter, named Farabi Ibn Kora , was the last to join the polemic, because he had trouble getting to the kaghan's court. Therefore, the first to speak were the Christian and Hebrew representatives, and the Greek began winning the kaghan over to his side. A man with soupy eyes and freckled hair, he sat at the royal table and said:

"In a barrel the most important thing is the hole; in a jug, what is not the jug; in the soul, what is not man; in the head, what is not the head, which is to say the word . . . . Now, listen, you who do not feed on silence.

"Unlike the Saracens or Jews, in giving you the cross we Greeks will not take your word as security. You are not required to take up our Greek language with the cross; on the contrary, you may keep your Khazar language. But know that this will not be the case if you adopt Judaism or the law of Mohammed. If you adopt either of those religions, you will also have to adopt their language."

Upon hearing these words, the kaghan was prepared to accept the tenets of the Greek, but then Princess Ateh spoke up and said:

A man who sells birds to me that living in a town on the Caspian shores are two renowned artists--a father and a son. The father is a painter, the man told me, and you will recognize his work by seeing the bluest of all blues you have even seen. His son is a poet, and you will recognize his poems by feeling that you have heard them before, not from someone else, but from a plant or animal. . . .

I put on my traveling rings and set out for the Caspian shores. When I reached the town, I made inquires and found the two men. I recognized them immediately from the bird vendor's description: the father painted glorious pictures, and the son wrote marvelous poems in a lovely, entirely unknown (to me) language. I liked them both but they also liked me and asked: "Which of the two of us will you choose?"

"I have chosen the son," I told them, "because he doesn't need a translator."

But the Greek would not let himself be pulled by the earring, and remarked that we humans are whole because we are made of two who are lame, and that women can see because they are composed of two who are one-eyed. As an illustration he told the following story:

When I was a young man, I fell in love with a girl. She didn't notice me, but I didn't give up, and one evening I spoke of my love so passionately to Sofia (that was her name) that she embraced me and I felt her tears on my cheek. I immediately knew from their taste that she was blind, but that didn't bother me. We were still embracing when suddenly horse hoofs could be heard thudding through the nearby woods.

"Is that a white horse whose hoofs can be heard through our kisses?" she asked me.

"We don't and won't know," I replied, "until it comes out of the forest."

"You haven't understood a thing," she said, and at that moment a white horse emerged from the woods.

"Yes, I have, I've understood everything," I responded and asked her the color of my eyes.

"Green," she said.

"Look, my eyes are blue. . . ."

The kaghan was impressed by the Greek representative's story, and he was on the verge of adopting the Christian God when, sensing what was happening, Princess Ateh decided to leave. Before going, she turned to the kaghan and said:

This morning my master asked me whether I felt in my heart as he did in his. I had long nails with silver thimbles that whistled and I was smoking nargileh, blowing green smoke rings.

In answer to my master's question, I replied, "No!"--and my pipe dropped from my mouth.

My master departed, disheartened, because he didn't know that as I watched him go I was thinking: It would have been the same had I said yes!

The kaghan flinched at these words and realized that, although the Greek was wearing the voice of an angel instead of shoes, the truth was on the other side. Finally he turned to the caliph's man, Farabi Ibn Kora, and asked him for his interpretation of the dream he had dreamed on one of the previous nights. An angel had come to him in his dream with the message that God was pleased by his intentions, but not by his deeds. Then Farabi Ibn Kora asked the kaghan:

"In your dream, was it an angel of recognition or an angel of revelation? Did it appear in the form of an apple tree or something else?"

When the kaghan answered it had been neither, Ibn Kora remarked:

"Of course it was neither, because it was a third angel. That third angel is Adam Ruhani, and you and your priests are trying to lift yourselves up to him. Those are your intentions, and they are good. But you are trying to achieve this by conceiving Adam as a book being written by your dreams and your dream hunters <../red/hunter.htm> . Those are your intentions and they are wrong, for you perform them by creating your own book in the absence of the Holy Book. Since the Holy Book is given to us, accept it from us, share it with us, and discard your own. . . ."

Upon hearing these words, the kaghan embraced Farabi Ibn Kora, and that put an end to it all. He adopted Islam, doffed his shoes, prayed to Allah, and ordered the name bestowed on him by Khazar tradition, before his birth, to be burned.




KHAZAR POLEMIC

--The event that Christian sources attribute to the year 861 A.D., according to The Life of Constantine of Thessalonica, St. Cyril, written in the ninth century and preserved in what is refereed to as the manuscript of the Moscow Spiritual Academy and in the 1469 version of Vladislav the Grammarian. In that year of 861 A.D., Khazar envoys came before the Byzantine emperor and said: "We have always recognized only one God, who rules over us all, and we bow to Him facing east, and uphold our other pagan customs as well. The Jews are trying to persuade us to adopt their faith and rites, and the Saracens are offering peace and many gifts to draw us to their own faith, saying, 'Our faith is better than all other peoples' '; therefore, nurturing an old friendship and love, we now turn to you, for you, the Greeks, are a great people vested with imperial power by God; in seeking your advice, we ask you to send us one of your learned men, for if he emerges victorious from the debate with the Jews and the Saracens, we shall adopt your faith."

When the Greek emperor asked Cyril if he would go to the Khazars, the latter replied that he would embark on such a journey on foot and in his bare feet. Daubmannus believes that what Cyril meant was that he needed as much time to prepare for his journey as it would take him to walk from Constantinople to the Crimea, for at the time Cyril was still illiterate in his dreams and did not know how to unlock them from the inside; in other words, he did not know how to wake up when he wanted. Nevertheless, he accepted the mission, and in Kherson, where he stopped along the way, he learned Hebrew and translated the Hebrew grammar into Greek in preparation for the polemic at the court of the Khazar kaghan. He and his brother, Methodius, passed Lake Meot and the Caspian gates of the Caucasus Mountains, where they met the kaghan's envoy. The envoy asked Constantine the Philosopher why he always held a book before him when speaking, while the Khazars extracted all wisdom from their chests, as if they had swallowed it first. Constantine replied that he felt naked without a book, and who would believe that a naked man has many robes? To meet Constantine and Methodius, the Khazar deputy had traveled from the capital, Itil, to Sarkel on the Don, and to Kherson. He then lead the Byzantine envoys to Samandar, on the Caspian Sea, the kaghan's summer residence, where the polemic was to be held. At court, where the Jewish and Saracen representatives had already arrived, the question arose as to what rank Constantine should have at the dinner table. He responded: "I had a great and very famous grandfather who was close to the emperor, but, because he refused the honors bestowed upon him, he was exiled, and he arrived in a strange land where he became poor and I was born. I, seeking my grandfather's one-time honor, have not succeeded in achieving it; you see, I am only the grandson of Adam."

"You worship the Trinity," said the kaghan in his dinner toast, "and we worship but one God, as it is written in the books. Why is that?"

The Philosopher replied:

"Books preach the Word and the Spirit. If someone pays you honor but does not respect your word and spirit, while another respects al three, which of the two pays greater honor?"

The Jewish representative asked:

"Tell us, then, how a can woman place in her womb God, whom she cannot see, let alone give birth to?"

The Philosopher pointed to the kaghan and his first counselor, saying; "If someone were to say that the first counselor cannot receive the kaghan, but that the lowliest servant can both receive him and render him honor, tell me than, what should we call him: mad or sensible?'

Now the Saracens joined the polemic, and Constantine the Philosopher was asked about a custom he had first encountered in Samarra, at the Saracen caliph's. The Saracens used to place a picture of the devil on the outside of Christian houses; on each Christian door was a figure of some demon. And the Saracens, who had long been trying to poison Constantine, asked him:

"Do you, Philosopher, comprehend the significance of this?"

And he said:

"I se the demonic figures, and I think that Christians live inside, but since demons cannot coexist with them they run outside. And if there are no demon figures outside, it means they are inside with the household . . . ."

Another badly damaged Christian source on the Khazar polemic has reached us in the form of a legend concerning the Kievites' conversion to Christianity in the 10th century. From the legend, in which Constantine the Philosopher was among the participants in the Kiev polemic about the three religions (even though he lived one hundred years earlier), one can recognize a document that was originally about the Khazar polemic. If we abstract the additions and revisions of the 10th and later centuries, this source's report on the Khazar polemic would look roughly as follows.

A Khazar kaghan whose fortunes had flourished in the wars against the Pechenegs and the Greeks, from whom he had captured Kherson (Kerch on the Crimea), decided to adopt a leisurely life after all his military successes. He wanted to have as many women as the soldiers he had lost in the war. "He had many women," says a version of this legend published in Venice in 1772 in the Serbian language, "And, wanting to have women of all faiths, he not only worshiped various idols, but, out of affection for his women and mistresses, also wanted to profess different faiths." This prompted various foreigners (Greeks, Arabs, Jews) to rush to the kaghan with their envoys, in the hope of converting him immediately to their own faith. Constantine the philosopher, sent by the Greek emperors, was more successful that the Jews or Saracens in the polemic at the court of the Khazar kaghan, says this source. But, unable to reach a final decision, the kaghan kept hesitating, until finally on e of his kin, recognizable as Princess Ateh, who is familiar to us from a third source, stepped in. Her people convinced the kaghan to send them out among the Jews, Greeks, and Saracens to investigate their doctrines first hand. When this woman's mission returned, it recommenced Christianity as the most suitable faith, and the envoys revealed to the kaghan that his relative, whom they served, had adopted Christianity long before. The third source of Christian references to the Khazar polemic--Daubmannus--believed that the kaghan was frightened by the news. Consequently, fortune fell to the Jewish representative after the kaghan discovered that Christians, like Jews, observe the Old Testament. When Constantine confirmed that this was true, the kaghan turned to the Jew, who had fled to the Khazars from Greece and strongly advocated Judaism. "Of us three dream hunters," the Romaniot told the kaghan, "the only one you Khazars have no reason to fear is me, a rabbi; for neither a caliph, with the green sails of his fleet, nor a Greek emperor, with a cross over his armies, stands behind the Jews. Behind Constantine of Thessalonica come spears and cavalry, but behind me, a Jewish rabbi, trail prayer shawls. . . . "

So spoke the rabbi, and the kaghan now favored him and his arguments, when Princess Ateh intervened in the polemic and once again altered the outcome of the conversation. The decisive words in the Khazar polemic, spoken by Ateh to the Jewish participant were:

You say: Let him who wants wealth turn to the North, and let him who wants window to the South! But why do you speak such sweet words to me here in the North and not to Wisdom, who awaits you in the land of your fathers? Why did you not go there, where light lays its eggs, where centuries rub against centuries, to drink the sour rain of the Dead Sea, to kiss the sand that runs in oblique streams like a stretched rope of gold in place of water from Jerusalem's wells? Instead you tell me that I dream of an inky night and that only in your reality is there moonlight. Why do you say this to me?

Yet another week has grown poor and thin. It has spent its most solemn day, which you say begins in Palestine, the day it had so jealously guarded, but whose time has come. It gives it up reluctantly, piece by piece. Take your piece; take your Sabbath and then go. Go to Wisdom and say everything you wanted to say to me. You will be happier. But beware: to conquer a fortress, one must first conquer one's own soul.

But I tell you all this in vain, for you carry your eyes in your mouth and do not see until you speak. My conclusion is this: either your saying is wrong or it is not you expected in the South but someone else. How else am I to understand why you are here in the North and with me?

Princess Ateh's words startled the Khazar kaghan and he told the rabbi he had heard that the Jews themselves admitted that their God had abandoned and scattered them all over the world. "Do you with to draw us to your faith so that you may have comrades in your misery, and so that we Khazars may be punished by God as you are and scattered throughout the world?"

The kaghan then turned away from the Jew and again found the most acceptable arguments to be those of Constantine the Philosopher. He and his chief aides converted to Christianity and sent the Greek emperor a letter, cited in Cyril's hagiography that read:

"Your Serene Majesty, you sent us a man who has explained to us the glory of the Christian faith in both word and deed, and we are convinced that it is the true faith and are commanding people to baptize themselves voluntarily. . . ."

According to another source, the kaghan, having accepted Constantine's reasons, quite unexpectedly decided to go to war against the Greeks instead of adopting their faith. He said, "You do not beg for faith, you obtain it by the sword!" He attacked them from Kherson and when he had victoriously completed his campaign, he asked the Greek emperor for a Greek princess to take as his wife. The emperor set only one condition--that the Khazar kaghan convert to Christianity. To the great surprise of Constantinople, the kaghan accepted the term, and that is how the Khazars were converted.

Mongol court

Debates ain't the way they used to be



Who?
William of Rubruck (c. 1220 in Rubrouck Flanders[1] - c. 1293): a Flemish Franciscan missionary and explorer.
A must read: Itinerarium fratris Willielmi de Rubruquis de ordine fratrum Minorum, Galli, Anno gratia 1253 ad partes Orientales.
Why? Because it is not written by Marco Polo. And, because at one point of his stay among the Mongols, William entered into a famous competition at the Mongol court, as the khan encouraged a formal debate between the Christians, Buddhists, and Muslims, to determine which faith was correct, as determined by three judges, one from each faith. The debate drew a large crowd, and as with most Mongol events, a great deal of alcohol was involved. As described by Jack Weatherford in his book Genghis Khan and the Making of the Modern World:
No side seemed to convince the other of anything. Finally, as the effects of the alcohol became stronger, the Christians gave up trying to persuade anyone with logical arguments, and resorted to singing. The Muslims, who did not sing, responded by loudly reciting the Koran in an effort to drown out the Christians, and the Buddhists retreated into silent mediation. At the end of the debate, unable to convert or kill one another, they concluded the way most Mongol celebrations concluded, with everyone simply too drunk to continue.
—Jack Weatherford, Genghis Khan and the Making of the Modern World, p. 173


Here is an account of the debate:

[Religious Debate at the Khan's Court]

The next day, which was Sunday before Pentecost (24th May [1254]), they took me to court; and the grand secretaries of the court came to me, and one was the Mo'al who handed the Chan his cup, and the others were Saracens, and they inquired on the part of the Chan why I had come. Then I repeated what has previously been said; how I had come to Sartach, and from Sartach to Baatu, and how Baatu had sent me thither; then I said to him: "I have nothing to say from the part of any man. (This he must have known from what Baatu had written to him.) I have only to speak the words of God, if he wishes to hear them." They interrupted me, asking what words of God I wished to speak, thinking that I wanted to foretell some piece of good fortune to him, as many others do. I replied to them: "If you want me to speak the words of God to him, procure for me the interpreter." They said: "We have sent for him; but speak (now) through this one as well as you can; we understand you very well." And they urged me greatly that I should speak. So I said: "Of him unto whom much has been given much [J: more] shall be required. And furthermore, of him to whom much has been given much love is required [J: He to whom more hath been given must love the more]. By these words of God I teach Mangu, for God hath given him great power, and the riches which he has were not given him by the idols of the Tuins, but by Almighty God, who made heaven and earth, in whose hand are all kingdoms, and who removes it (i.e., power) from one nation to another on account of the sins of men. So if he shall love Him, it shall be well with him; if otherwise, he must know that God will require all things of him to the last farthing." Then one of the Saracens said: "Is there anyone who does not love God?" I replied: "God says: 'If one love me, he keepeth my commandments; and he who loveth me not keepeth not my commandments.' So he who keepeth not the commandments of God loveth not God." Then he said: "Have you been to heaven, that you know the commandments of God?" "No," I replied, "but He has given them from heaven to holy men, and finally He descended from heaven to teach us, and we have them in the Scriptures, and we see by men's works when they keep them or not." Then he said: "Do you wish, then, to say that Mangu Chan does not keep the commandments of God?" I said to him: "Let the dragoman come, as you have said, and I will, in the presence of Mangu, if it pleases him, recite the commandments of God, and he shall judge for himself whether he keeps them or not." Then they went away, and told him that I had said that he was an idolater, or Tuin, and that he did not keep God's commandments.
The next day (25th May) (the Chan) sent his secretaries to me, who said: "Our lord sends us to you to say that you are here Christians, Saracens and Tuins. And each of you says that his doctrine is the best, and his writings--that is, books--the truest. So he wishes that you shall all meet together, and make a comparison [J: and hold a conference], each one writing down his precepts, so that he himself may be able to know the truth." Then I said: "Blessed be God, who put this in the Chan's heart. But our Scriptures tell us, the servant of God should not dispute, but should show mildness to all; so I am ready, without disputation or contention, to give reason for the faith and hope of the Christians, to the best of my ability." They wrote down my words, and carried them back to him. Then it was told the Nestorians that they should look to themselves, and write down what they wished to say, and likewise to the Saracens, and in the same way to the Tuins.
The next day (26th May) he again sent secretaries, who said: "Mangu Chan wishes to know why you have come to these parts." I replied to them: "He must know it by Baatu's letters." Then they said: "The letters of Baatu have been lost, and he has forgotten what Baatu wrote to him; so he would know from you." Then feeling safer I said: "It is the duty of our faith to preach the Gospel to all men. So when I heard of the fame of the Mo'al people, I was desirous of coming to them; and while this desire was on me, we heard that Sartach was a Christian. So I turned my footsteps toward him. And the lord king of the French sent him a letter containing kindly words, and among other things he bore witness to what kind of men we were, and requested that he would allow us to remain among the men of Mo'al. Then he (i.e., Sartach) sent us to Baatu, and Baatu sent us to Mangu Chan; so we have begged him, and do again beg him, to permit us to remain." They wrote all these things down, and carried it back to him on the morrow.
Then he again sent them to me, saying: "The Chan knows well that you have no mission to him, but that you have come to pray for him, like other righteous priests; but he would know if ever any ambassadors from you have come to us, or any of ours gone to you." Then I told them all about David and Friar Andrew, and they, putting it all down in writing, reported it back to him.
Then he again sent them to me, saying: "You have stayed here a long while; (the Chan) wishes you to go back to your own country, and he has inquired whether you will take an ambassador of his with you." I replied to them: "I would not dare take his envoys outside his own dominions, for there is a hostile country between us and you, and seas and mountains; and I am but a poor monk; so I would not venture to take them under my leadership." And they, having written it all down, went back.
Pentecost eve came (30th May). The Nestorians had written a whole chronicle from the creation of the world to the Passion of Christ; and passing over the Passion [J: (correcting Rockhill): and they went beyond the passion], they had touched on the Ascension and the resurrection of the dead and on the coming to judgment, and in it there were some censurable statements, which I pointed out to them. As for us, we simply wrote out the symbol of the mass, "Credo in unum Demn." Then I asked them how they wished to proceed. They said they would discuss in the first place with the Saracens. I showed them that that was not a good plan, for the Saracens agreed with us in saying that there is one God: "So you have (in them) a help against the Tuins." They agreed with this. Then I asked them if they knew how idolatry had arisen in the world, and they were in ignorance of it. Then I told them, and they said: "Tell them these things, then let us speak, for it is a difficult matter to talk through an interpreter." I said to them: "Try how you will manage against them; I will take the part of the Tuins, and you will maintain that of the Christians. We will suppose I belong to that sect, because they say that God is not; now prove that God is." For there is a sect there which says that whatever spirit (anima) and whatever virtue [J: whatever soul or any power] is in anything, is the God of that thing, and that God exists not otherwise. Then the Nestorians were unable to prove anything, but only to tell what the Scriptures tell. I said: "They do not believe in the Scriptures; you tell me one thing, and they tell another [J: if you tell them one story, they will quote you another]." Then I advised them to let me in the first place meet them, so that, if I should be confounded, they would still have a chance to speak; if they should be confounded, I should not be able to get a hearing after that. They agreed to this.
We were assembled then on Pentecost eve at our oratory, and Mangu Chan sent three secretaries who were to be umpires, one a Christian, one a Saracen, and one a Tuin; and it was published aloud: "This is the order of Mangu, and let no one dare say that the commandment of God differs from it. And he orders that no one shall dare wrangle or insult any other, or make any noise by which this business shall be interfered with, on penalty of his head." Then all were silent. And there was a great concourse of people there; for each side had called thither the most learned of its people, and many others had also assembled.
Then the Christians put me in the middle, telling the Tuins to speak with me. Then they--and there was a great congregation of them--began to murmur against Mangu Chan, for no other Chan had ever attempted to pry into their secrets. Then they opposed to me one who had come from Cathay, and who had his interpreter; and I had the son of master William. He began by saying to me: "Friend, if you think you are going to be hushed up (conclusus), look for a more learned one than yourself." I remained silent. Then (the Tuin) inquired by what I wished to begin the discussion, by the subject how the world was made, or what becomes of the soul after death. I replied to him: "Friend, this should not be the beginning of our talk. All things proceed from God. He is the fountain-head of all things; so we must first speak of God, of whom you think differently from us, and Mangu Chan wishes to know who holds the better belief." The umpires decided that this was right.
He wished to begin with these questions, as they consider them to be the weightiest; for they all hold this heresy of the Manichaeans [J: they all belong to the Manichaean heresy], that one half of things is evil, and the other half good, and that there are two (elemental) principles; and, as to souls, they believe that all pass from one body into another. Thus a most learned priest among the Nestorians questioned me (once) concerning the souls of animals, whether they could escape to any place where, after death, they would not be forced to labor. In confirmation furthermore of this error, as I was told by master William, there had been brought from Cathay a boy who, from the size of his body, was not more than twelve years old [J: three years old], but who was capable of all forms of reasoning, and who said of himself that he had been incarnated three times; he knew how to read and write.
So I said to the Tuin: "We believe firmly in our hearts and we confess with our mouths that God is, and that there is only one God, one in perfect unity. What do you believe?" He said : "Fools say that there is only one God, but the wise say that there are many. Are there not great lords in your country, and is not this Mangu Chan a greater lord? So it is of them, for they are different in different regions."
I said to him: "You choose a poor example, in which there is no comparison between man and God; according to that, every mighty man can call himself god in his own country." And as I was about to destroy the comparison, he interrupted me, asking: "Of what nature is your God, of whom you say that there is none other?" I replied: "Our God, besides whom there is none other, is omnipotent, and therefore requires the aid of none other, while all of us require His aid. It is not thus with man. No man can do everything, and so there must be several lords in the world, for no one can do all things. So likewise He knows all things, and therefore requires no councilor, for all wisdom comes of Him. Likewise, He is the supreme good, and wants not of our goods. But we live, move, and are in Him. Such is our God, and one must not consider Him otherwise."
"It is not so," he replied. "Though there is one (God) in the sky who is above all others, and of whose origin we are still ignorant, there are ten others under him, and under these latter is another lower one. On the earth they are in infinite number." And as he wanted to spin (texere) some other yarns, I asked him of this highest god, whether he believed he was omnipotent, or whether (he believed this) of some other god. Fearing to answer, he asked: "If your God is as you say, why does he make the half of things evil?" "That is not true," I said. " He who makes evil is not God. All things that are, are good."
At this all the Tuins were astonished, and they wrote it down as false or impossible. Then he asked: "Whence then comes evil?" "You put your question badly," I said. "You should in the first place inquire what is evil, before you ask whence it comes. But let us go back to the first question, whether you believe that any god is omnipotent; after that I will answer all you may wish to ask me."
He sat for a long time without replying, so that it became necessary for the secretaries who were listening on the part of the Chan to tell him to reply. Finally he answered that no god was omnipotent. With that the Saracens burst out into a loud laugh. When silence was restored, I said: "Then no one of your gods can save you from every peril, for occasions may arise in which he has no power. Furthermore, no one can serve two masters: how can you serve so many gods in heaven and earth?" The audience told him to answer, but he remained speechless. And as I wanted to explain the unity of the divine essence and the Trinity to the whole audience, the Nestorians of the country said to me that it sufficed, for they wanted to talk. I gave in to them, but when they wanted to argue with the Saracens, they [the Saracens] answered them: "We concede your religion is true, and that everything is true that is in the Gospel: so we do not want to argue any point with you." And they confessed that in all their prayers they besought God to grant them to die as Christians die.
There was present there an old priest of the Iugurs, who say there is one god, though they make idols; they (i.e., the Nestorians) spoke at great length with him, telling him of all things down to the coming of the Antichrist into the world [J: the coming of Christ in judgement], and by comparisons demonstrating the Trinity to him and the Saracens. They all listened without making any contradiction, but no one said: "I believe; I want to become a Christian." When this was over, the Nestorians as well as the Saracens sang with a loud voice; while the Tuins kept silence, and after that they all [J: everyone] drank deeply.
[Final Audience with the Khan]

On Pentecost day (31st May) Mangu Chan called me before him, and also the Tuin with whom I had discussed; but before I went in, the interpreter, master William's son, said to me that we should have to go back to our country, and that I must not raise any objection, for he understood that it was a settled matter. When I came before the Chan I had to bend the knees, and so did the Tuin beside me, with his interpreter. Then (the Chan) said to me: "Tell me the truth, whether you said the other day, when I sent my secretaries to you, that I was a Tuin." I replied: "My lord, I did not say that; I will tell you what I said, if it pleases you." Then I repeated to him what I had said, and he replied: "I thought full well that you did not say it, for you should not have said it; but your interpreter translated badly." And he held out toward me the staff on which he leaned, saying: "Fear not." And I, smiling, said in an undertone: "If I had been afraid, I should not have come here." He asked the interpreter what I had said, and he repeated it to him. After that he began confiding to me his creed: "We Mo'al," he said, "believe that there is only one God, by whom we live and by whom we die, and for whom we have an upright heart." Then I said: "May it be so, for without His grace this cannot be." He asked what I had said; the interpreter told him. Then he added: "But as God gives us the different fingers of the hand, so he gives to men divers ways [J: several paths]. God gives you the Scriptures, and you Christians keep them not. You do not find (in them, for example) that one should find fault with another [J: abuse another], do you?" "No, my lord," I said; "but I told you from the first that I did not want to wrangle with anyone." "I do not intend to say it," he said, "for you [J: I am not referring to you]. Likewise you do not find that a man should depart from justice for money." "No, my lord," I said. "And truly I came not to these parts to obtain money; on the contrary I have refused what has been offered me." And there was a secretary present, who bore witness that I refused an iascot and silken cloths. "I dare not say it," he said, "for you. God gave you therefore the Scriptures, and you do not keep them; He gave us diviners, we do what they tell us, and we live in peace."
He drank four times, I believe, before he finished saying all this. And I was listening attentively for him to say something else of his creed, when he began talking of my return journey, saying: "You have stayed here a long while; I wish you to go back. You have said that you would not dare take my ambassadors with you; will you take my words, or my letter?" And from that time I never found the opportunity nor the time when I could show him the Catholic Faith. For no one can speak in his presence but so much as he wishes, unless he be an ambassador; for an ambassador can say whatever he chooses, and they always ask if he wishes to say something more. As for me, it was not allowed me to speak more; I had only to listen to him, and reply to his questions. So I answered him that he should make me understand his words, and have them put down in writing, for I would willingly take them as best I could. Then he asked me if I wanted gold or silver or costly clothing. I said: "We take no such things; but we have no traveling money, and without your assistance we cannot get out of your country." He said: "I will have you given all you require while in my possessions; do you want anything more?" I replied; "That suffices us." Then he asked: "How far do you wish to be taken?" I said: "Our power extends to the country of the King of Hermenia; if we were (escorted) that far, it would suffice me." He answered: "I will have you taken that far; after that look out for yourself." And he added: "There are two eyes in the head; but though there be two, they have but one sight, and when one turns its glance there goes the other. You came from Baatu, and so you must go back by way of him." When he had said this, I asked permission of him to speak. "Speak," he said. Then I said: "My lord, we are not men of war. We wish that those should have dominion over the world who rule it most justly, in accordance with the will of God. Our office is to teach men to live after the will of God. For that we have come here, and willingly would we remain here if it pleased you. Since it pleases you that we go back, that must then be. I will go back, and I will carry your letter as well as I can, as you have ordered. I would ask of your majesty that since I shall carry your letters, I may also come back to you with your consent; principally because you have poor slaves at Bolat, who are of our tongue, and who have no priest to teach them and their sons their religion, and willingly would I remain with them." Then he replied: "If your masters should send you back to me (you will be welcome)." I said: "My lord, I know not the will of my masters; but I have their permission to go wherever I wish, where it is needful to preach the word of God; and it seems to me that it is very needful in these parts; so whether he sends back envoys by us or not, if it pleases you I will come back."
Then he remained silent and sat for a long time as if thinking, and the interpreter told me to speak no more. So I waited anxiously for what he would reply. Finally he said: "You have along way to go, comfort yourself with food, so that you may reach your country in good health." And he had me given to drink, and then I went out from before him, and after that I went not back again. If I had had the power to work by signs and wonders like Moses, perhaps he would have humbled himself.
[Religious Customs]

Their diviners are, as (Mangu Chan) confessed to me, their priests; and whatever they say must be done is executed without delay. I will tell you of their office, as well as I could learn about it from master William and others who used to speak truthfully to me. They are very numerous and always have a captain, like a pontiff, who always places his dwelling before the principal house of Mangu Chan, at about a stone's throw from it. Under his custody are, as I have previously said, the carts in which the idols are carried. The others come after the ordu in positions assigned to them; and there come to them from various parts of the world people who believe in their art. Some among them know something of astronomy, particularly the chief, and they predict to them the eclipses of the sun and moon; and when one is about to take place all the people [stockpile] their food, for they must not go out of the door of their dwelling. And while the eclipse is taking place, they sound drums and instruments, and make a great noise and clamor. After the eclipse is over, they give themselves to drinking and feasting, and make great jollity. They predict lucky and unlucky days for the undertaking of all affairs; and so it is that they never assemble an army nor begin a war without their assent, and long since (the Mo'al) would have gone back to Hungary, but the diviners will not allow it.
All things which are sent to the court they take between fires, and for this they retain a certain portion of them [J: and for this they keep the due share of it]. They also cleanse all the bedding of deceased persons by taking them between fires. For when anyone dies, they put aside all that belongs to him, and they are not allowed to the other people of the ordu until they have been purified by fires. This I saw in connection with the ordu of that lady who died while we were there. On account of this (custom) there was a double reason why Friar Andrew and his companion should have gone between fires; they bore presents, and they were destined for one who was already dead, Keu Chan. Nothing of the sort was required of me, because I brought nothing. If any animal or any other thing falls to the ground while passing between the fires, it is theirs [J: it is the property of the soothsayers]."
On the ninth day of the month of May, they get together all the white horses of the herds, and consecrate them. And the Christian priests are obliged to come to this with their censer. Then they sprinkle new cosmos on the ground and hold a great feast on that day, for they consider that they then first drink new cosmos, just as in some places among us is done with wine at the feast of Bartholomew or Syxtus, and with fruit at the feast of James and Christopher.
They (i.e., the Kam) are also called in when a child is born, to tell its fortune; and when anyone sickens they are called, and they repeat their incantations, and tell whether it is a natural malady or one resulting from witchcraft. And in this connection that woman of Metz, of whom I have spoken, told me a most remarkable thing.
Once some valuable furs were presented, which were to be deposited in the ordu of her mistress, who was a Christian, as I have previously said; and the diviners carried them between fires, and took of them more than they should have done. A certain servant-woman who had charge of the treasure of this lady, accused them of this to her mistress; so the lady reproved them. Now it happened after this that this lady fell ill, and had shooting pains through her limbs. The diviners were called, and they, while seated at a distance, ordered one of the maids to put her hand on the painful spot, and to pull out whatever she should find. So she arose and did this, and she found they told her to put it on the ground; when it was put there it began to wriggle like some live animal. Then it was put into water, and it became like a leech, and they said: "Lady, some sorceress has done you this harm with her sorceries." And they accused her who had accused them about the furs. And she was taken outside the camp into the fields, and for seven days she was beaten and tried with other torments, so that she should confess. And in the meanwhile the lady died. When she heard of this she said to them: " I know that my mistress if dead; my kill me, that I may go after her, for I never did her wrong." And as she would confess nothing, Mangu commanded that she be allowed to live; and then those diviners accused the nurse of the daughter of the lady of whom I have spoken; and she was a Christian, and her husband was most [J: the most] respected among all the Nestorian priests. And she was taken to the place of execution with one of her maids, to make her confess; and the maid confessed that her mistress had sent her to speak to a horse, to get an answer from it. The woman (i.e., the nurse) also confessed that she had done something to make herself liked by her master (i.e., Mangu ?), so that he should show her favor, but she had never done anything which could have injured him. She was asked whether her husband knew what she had done. She made excuse for him, having burnt characters and letters she had made herself. So she was put to death; and Mangu sent her husband, this priest, to the bishop who was in Cathay, to try him, though he had not been found guilty.
In the meanwhile it happened that the first wife of Mangu Chan bore a son; and the diviners were called in to tell the child's fortune, and they all foretold it good luck, saying that it would live long and become a great lord. But after a few days it happened that the child died. Then the mother in a rage called the diviners, saying: "You told me that my son would live, and here he is dead." Then they replied: "Lady, here we see the witchcraft of the nurse of Chirina, who the other day was put to death. She killed your son, and now we see her carrying him off [J: we can see the witch, Chirina's nurse, who was put to death the other day: it is she who has killed your son, and look!--there she is, making off with him!]." There still lived a grown-up son and daughter of this woman in the camp, and the lady in a fury sent for them, and caused a man to kill the youth, and a woman the daughter, in revenge for her son, who the diviners had said had been killed by their mother. After this the Chan dreamed of these children, and on the morrow he asked what had been done with them. His servants were afraid to tell him; but he inquired the more solicitously where they were, for they had appeared to him in a vision of the night. Then they told him; and he forthwith sent to his wife, and asked her where she had found out that a wife could pass a death sentence, leaving her husband in ignorance (of what she had done); and he had her shut up for seven days, with orders that no food be given her. As to the man who had killed the youth, he had him decapitated, and had his head hung around the neck of the woman who had killed the young girl, and he caused her to be beaten with burning brands through the camp, and then put to death. And he would have put his own wife to death had it not been for the children he had had of her; but he left her ordu [J: but he left his residence (*presumably to avoid any lingering evil from his dream of the dead)], and did not go back there for a month.
These same diviners disturb the atmosphere with their incantations; and when it is so cold from natural causes that they can bring no relief, they pick out some persons in the camps whom they accuse of having brought about the cold, and they are put to death at once.
A short time before I left there, there was one of the concubines who was ill, and she had languished for a long time; so they said incantations over a certain German female slave of hers, who went to sleep for three days. And when she came back to herself they asked her what she had seen; (and she said) she had seen a great many persons, all of whom they declared would soon die; but she had not seen her mistress among them, so they declared that she would not die of her complaint. I saw the girl, who had still a good deal of pain in her head from her sleep.
Some among them evoke devils, and assemble at night in their dwelling those who want to have answers from the devil, and they place cooked meat in the center of the dwelling; and the cham who does the invocation begins repeating his incantations, and strikes violently the ground with a drum [J: tambourine] he holds. Finally he enters into a fury, and causes himself to be bound. Then comes the devil in the dark, and gives him the meat to eat, and he gives answers.
Once, as I was told by master William, a certain Hungarian hid himself among them; and the devil who was on top of the dwelling [J: and the demon made his appearance on top of the dwelling and] cried that he could not come in, for there was a Christian among them. Hearing this, he fled in all haste, for they set about looking for him. This and many other things they do, which it would take too long to tell of.
(this is from W. W. Rockhill: The journey of William of Rubruck to the eastern parts of the world, 1253-55, as narrated by himself, with two accounts of the earlier journey of John of Pian de Carpine. tr. from the Latin and ed., with an introductory notice, by William Woodville Rockhill (London: Hakluyt Society, 1900). Notes and some additional headings have been added, and the text checked against the more recent Hakluyt Society translation, whose extensive notes by two noted Mongol specialists make it the preferred edition for those who wish full scholarly annotation: The mission of Friar William of Rubruck : his journey to the court of the Great Khan Möngke, 1253-1255, tr. by Peter Jackson; introduction, notes and appendices by Peter Jackson with David Morgan (London: Hakluyt Society, 1990).




It is still fun to read the online version of Richard Hakluyt in 1598-1600.

Chapters include:
• How the Nestorians, Saracens, and Idolaters are ioyned together. Chap. 26.
• Of their Temples and idoles: and howe they behaue themselues in worshipping their false gods. Chap. 27.
• Of diuers and sundry nations: and of certaine people which were wont to eate their owne parents. Chap. 28.

The last makes for particularly compelling reading. Here you go:
From, William de Rubruquis
The iournal of frier William de Rubruquis a French man of the order of the minorite friers, vnto the East parts of the worlde. An. Dom. 1253.

How the Nestorians, Saracens, and Idolaters are ioyned together. Chap. 26.
[The people called Iugures idolaters.] The first sort of these idolaters are called Iugures: whose land bordereth vpon the foresaid land of Organum, within the said mountains Eastward: and in al their cities Nestorians do inhabit together, and they are dispersed likewise towards Persia in the cities of the Saracens. The citizens of the foresaid city of Cailac had 3. idole-Temples: and I entred into two of them, to beholde their foolish superstitions. In the first of which I found a man hauing a crosse painted with ink vpon his hand, whereupon I supposed him to be a Christian: for he answered like a Christian vnto al questions which I demanded of him. And I asked him, Why therefore haue you not the crosse with the image of Iesu Christ thereupon? And he answered: We haue no such custome. Whereupon I coniectured that they were indeede Christians: but, that for lacke of instruction they omitted the foresaide ceremonie. For I saw there behind a certaine chest (which was vnto them in steed of an altar, whereupon they set candles and oblations) an image hauing wings like vnto the image of Saint Michael, and other images also, holding their fingers, as if they would blesse some body. That euening I could not find any thing els. For the Saracens doe onely inuite men thither, but they will not haue them speake of their religion. And therfore, when I enquired of the Saracens concerning such ceremonies, they were offended thereat. On the morrow after were the Kalends, and the Saracens feast of Passeouer. And changing mine Inne or lodging the same day, I tooke vp mine abode neere vnto another idole-Temple. For the citizens of the said citie of Cailac doe curteously inuite, and louingly intertaine all messengers, euery man of them according to his abilitie and portion. And entring into the foresaid idole-Temple, I found the Priests of the said idoles there. For alwayes at the Kalends they set open their Temples, and the priests adorne themselues, and offer vp the peoples oblations of bread and fruits. First therefore I will describe vnto you those rites and ceremonies, which are common vnto all their idole-Temples: and then the superstitions of the foresaid Iugures, which be, as it were, a sect distinguished from the rest They doe all of them worship towards the North, clapping their hands together, and prostrating themselues on their knees vpon the earth, holding also their foreheads in their hands. Wherupon the Nestorians of those parts will in no case ioyne their hands together in time of prayer: but they pray, displaying their hands before their breasts. They extend their Temples in length East and West: and vpon the North side they build a chamber, in maner of a Vestry for themselues to goe forth into. Or sometimes it is otherwise. If it be a foure square Temple, in the midst of the Temple towards the North side therof, they take in one chamber in that place where the quire should stand. And within the said chamber they place a chest long and broad like vnto a table: and behinde the saide chest towardes the South stands their principall idole: which I sawe at Caracaram, and it was as bigge as the idole of Saint Christopher. [Frier William was at Caracarum.] Also a certaine Nestorian priest, which had bin in Catay, saide that in that countrey there is an idole of so huge a bignes, that it may be seen two daies iourney before a man come at it. And so they place other idoles round about the foresaid principal idole, being all of them finely gilt ouer with pure golde: and vpon the saide chest, which is in manner of a table, they set candles and oblations. The doores of their Temples are alwayes opened towards the South, contrary to the custome of the Saracens. They haue also great belles like vnto vs. And that is the cause (as I thinke) why the Christians of the East will in no case vse great belles. Notwithstanding they are common among the Russians, and Græcians of Gasaria.
Of their Temples and idoles: and howe they behaue themselues in worshipping their false gods. Chap. 27.
All their Priests had their heads and beards shauen quite ouer: and they are clad in saffron coloured garments: and being once shauen, they lead an vnmaried life from that time forward: and they liue an hundreth or two hundreth of them together in one cloister or couent. Vpon those dayes when they enter into their temples, they place two long foormes therein: [Bookes.] and so sitting vpon the sayd foormes like singing men in a quier, namely the one halfe of them directly ouer against the other, they haue certaine books in their hands, which sometimes they lay downe by them vpon the foormes: and their heads are bare so long as they remaine in the temple. And there they reade softly vnto themselues, not vttering any voice at all. Whereupon comming in amongst them, at the time of their superstitious deuotions, and finding them all siting mute in maner aforesayde, I attempted diuers waies to prouoke them vnto speach, and yet could not by any means possible. They haue with them also whithersoeuer they goe, a certaine string with an hundreth or two hundreth nutshels thereupon, much like to our bead-roule which we cary about with vs. And they doe alwayes vtter these words: _Ou mam Hactani_, God thou knowest: as one of them expounded it vnto me. And so often doe they expect a reward at Gods hands, as they pronounce these words in remembrance of God. Round about their temple they doe alwayes make a faire court, like vnto a churchyard, which they enuiron with a good wall: and vpon the South part thereof they build a great portal, wherein they sit and conferre together. And vpon the top of the said portall they pitch a long pole right vp, exalting it, if they can, aboue all the whole towne besides. And by the same pole all men may knowe, that there stands the temple of their idoles. These rites and ceremonies aforesayd be common vnto all idolaters in those parts. Going vpon a time towards the foresayd idole-temple, I found certain priests sitting in the outward portal. And those which I sawe, seemed vnto me, by their shauen beards, as if they had bene French men. They wore certaine ornaments vpon their heads made of paper. The priestes of the foresaide Iugures doe vse such attire whithersoeuer they goe. They are alwaies in their saffron coloured iackets, which be very straight being laced or buttened from the bosome right downe, after the French fashion. And they haue a cloake vpon their left shoulder descending before and behind vnder the right arme, like vnto a deacon carying the housselboxe in time of lent. Their letters or kind of writing the Tartars did receiue. [Sidenote: Paper. So do the people of China vse to write, drawing their lines perpendicularly downward, and not as we doe from the right hand to the lefte.] They begin to write at the top of their paper drawing their lines right downe: and so they reade and multiply their lines from the left hand to the right. They doe vse certaine papers and characters in their magical practices. Whereupon their temples are full of such short scroules hanged round about them. Also Mangu–Can hath sent letters vnto your Maiestie written in the language of the Moals or Tartars, and in the foresayd hand or letter of the Iugures. They burne their dead according to the auncient custome, and lay vp the ashes in the top of a Pyramis. Now, after I had sit a while by the foresaid priests, and entred into their temple and seene many of their images both great and small, I demanded of them what they beleeued concerning God? And they answered: We beleeue that there is onely one God. And I demaunded farther: Whether do you beleue that he is a spirit, or some bodily substance? They saide: We beleeue that he is a spirite. Then said I: Doe you beleeue that God euer tooke mans nature vpon him? They answered: Noe. And againe I said: Sithence ye beleeue that he is a spirit, to what end doe you make so many bodily images to represent him? Sithence also you beleeue not that hee was made man: why doe you resemble him rather vnto the image of a man then of any other creature? Then they answered saying: we frame not these images whereby to represent God. But when any rich man amongst vs, or his sonne, or his wife, or any of his friends deceaseth, hee causeth the image of the dead party to be made, and to be placed here: and we in remembrance of him doe reuerence thereunto. Then I replyed: you doe these things onely for the friendship and flatterie of men. Noe (said they) but for their memory. Then they demanded of me, as it were in scoffing wise: Where is God? To whom I answered: where is your soule? They said, in our bodies. Then saide I, is it not in euery part of your bodie, ruling and guiding the whole bodie, and yet notwithstanding is not seene or perceiued? Euen so God is euery where and ruleth all things, and yet is he inuisible, being vnderstanding and wisedome it selfe. Then being desirous to haue had some more conference with them, by reason that mine interpreter was weary, and not able to expresse my meaning, I was constrained to keepe silence. The Moals or Tartars are in this regard of their sect: namely they beleeue that there is but one God: howbeit they make images of felt, in remembrance of their deceased friends, couering them with fiue most rich and costly garments, and putting them into one or two carts, which carts no man dare once touch: and they are in the custody of their soothsayers, who are their priests, concerning whom I will giue your Highnesse more at large to vnderstand hereafter. These soothsayers or diuiners do alwaies attend vpon the court of Mangu and of other great personages. As for the poorer or meaner sorte, they haue them not, but such onely as are of the stocke and kindred of Chingis. And when they are to remoue or to take any iourney, the said diuiners goe before them, euen as the cloudie piller went before the children of Israel. And they appoint ground where the tents must be pitched, and first of al they take down their owne houses: and after them the whole court doth the like. Also vpon their festiual dates or kalends they take forth the foresayd images, and place them in order round, or circle wise within the house. Then come the Moals or Tartars, and enter into the same house, bowing themselues before the said images and worship them. Moreouer, it is not lawfull for any stranger to enter into that house. For vpon a certaine time I my selfe would haue gone in, but I was chidden full well for my labour.
Of diuers and sundry nations: and of certaine people which were wont to eate their owne parents. Chap. 28.
But the foresayd Iugures (who liue among the Christians, and the Saracens) by their sundry disputations as I suppose, haue bene brought vnto this, to beleeue that there is but one onely God. And they dwelt in certaine cities, which afterward were brought in subiection vnto Chingis Can: whereupon he gaue his daughter in mariage vnto their king. [The countrey of Presbiter Iohn] Also the citie of Caracarum it selfe is in a manner within their territory: and the whole countrey of king or Presbyter Iohn, and of his brother Vut lyeth neere vnto their dominions: sauing, that they inhabite in certaine pastures Northward and the sayde Iugures betweene the mountaines towardes the South. Whereupon it came to passe, that the Moals receiued letters from them. And they are the Tartars principall scribes and al the Nestorians almost can skill of their letters. [Tangut.] Next vnto them, between the foresaid mountaines Eastward, inhabiteth the nation of Tangut, who are a most valiant people, and tooke Chingis in battell. But after the conclusion of a league hee was set at libertie by them, and afterward subdued them. [Strange oxen.] These people of Tangut haue oxen of great strength, with tailes like vnto horses, and with long shagge haire vpon their backes and bellyes. They haue legges greater then other oxen haue, and they are exceedingly fierce. These oxen drawe the great houses of the Moals and their hornes are slender, long, streight, and most sharpe pointed, insomuch that their owners are faine to cut off the endes of them. A cowe will not suffer her selfe to be coupled vnto one of them vnles they whistle or sing vnto her. They haue also the qualities of a Buffe: for if they see a man clothed in red, they run vpon him immediately to kill him. [The people of Tebet.] Next vnto them are the people of Tebet, men which were wont to eate the carkases of their deceased parents that for pities sake, they might make no other sepulchre for them, then their owne bowels. Howbeit of late they haue left off this custome, because that thereby they became abominable and odious vnto al other nations. Notwithstanding vnto this day they make fine cups of the skuls of their parents, to the ende that when they drinke out of them, they may amidst all their iollities and delights call their dead parents to remembrance. This was tolde mee by one that saw it. [Sidenote: Abundance of golde.] The sayd people of Tebet haue great plentie of golde in their land. Whosoeuer therefore wanteth golde, diggeth till he hath found some quantitie, and then taking so much thereof as will serue his turne, he layeth vp the residue within the earth: because, if he should put it into his chest or storehouse, hee is of opinion that God would withholde from him all other gold within the earth. I sawe some of those people, being very deformed creatures. [The stature of the people of Tangut, and of the Iugures.] In Tangut I saw lusty tall men, but browne and swart in colour. The Iugures are of a middle stature like vnto our French men. Amongst the Iugures is the originall and roote of the Turkish, and Comanian languages. [Langa and Solanga.] Next vnto Tebet are the people of Langa and Solanga, whose messengers I saw in the Tartars court. And they had brought more than ten great cartes with them, euery one of which was drawen with sixe oxen. [The people of Solanga resemble Spaniards.] They be little browne men like vnto Spaniards. Also they haue iackets, like vnto the vpper vestment of a deacon, sauing that the sleeues are somewhat streighter. And they haue miters vpon their heads like bishops. But the fore part of their miter is not so hollow within as the hinder part: neither is it sharpe pointed or cornered at the toppe: but there hang downe certaine square flappes compacted of a kinde of strawe which is made rough and rugged with extreme heat, and is so trimmed, that it glittereth in the sunne beames, like vnto a glasse, or an helmet well burnished. And about their temples they haue long bands of the foresayd matter fastened vnto their miters, which houer in the wind, as if two long hornes grewe out of their heads. And when the wind tosseth them vp and downe too much, they tie them ouer the midst of their miter from one temple to another: and so they lie circle wise ouerthwart their heads. [A table of elephants tooth.] Moreouer their principal messenger comming vnto the Tartars court had a table of elephants tooth about him of a cubite in length, and a handfull in breadth, being very smoothe. And whensoeuer hee spake vnto the Emperor himselfe, or vnto any other great personage, hee alwayes beheld that table, as if hee had found therein those things which hee spake: neither did he cast his eyes to the right hand, nor to the lefte, nor vpon his face, with whom he talked. Yea, going too and fro before his lord, he looketh no where but only vpon his table. [The people called Muc.] Beyond them (as I vnderstand of a certainty) there are other people called Muc, hauing villages, but no one particular man of them appropriating any cattell vnto himselfe. Notwithstanding there are many flockes and droues of cattell in their countrey, and no man appointed to keepe them. But when any one of them standeth in neede of any beast, hee ascendeth vp vnto an hill, and there maketh a shout, and all the cattel which are within hearing of the noyse, come flocking about him, and suffer themselues to be handled and taken, as if they were tame. And when any messenger or stranger commeth into their countrie, they shut him vp into an house, ministring there things necessary vnto him, vntill his businesse be despatched. For if anie stranger should trauell through that countrie, the cattell would flee away at the very sent of him, and so would become wilde. [Sidenote: Great Cathaya.] Beyond Muc is great Cathaya, the inhabitants whereof (as I suppose) were of olde time, called Seres. For from them are brought most excellent stuffes of silke. And this people is called Seres of a certame towne in the same countrey. I was crediblie informed, that in the said countrey, there is one towne hauing walls of siluer, and bulwarkes or towers of golde. There be many prouinces in that land, the greater part whereof are not as yet subdued vnto the Tartars. And amongst20
For the more intrepid:

Quod Nestorini et Saraceni sunt mixti et Idolatræ. Cap. 26.
[Iugures populi, Idolatræ.] Primi sunt Iugures, quorum terra contiguatur cum terra prædicta Organum inter montes illos versus Orientem: Et in omnibus ciuitatibus eorum sunt mixti Nestorini et Saraceni. Et ipsi etiam sunt diffusi versus Persidem in ciuitatibus Saracenorum. [Cailac.] In prædicta ciuitate Cailac habebant etiam ipsi tres Idolatrias, quarum duas intraui, vt viderem stultitias eorum. In prima inueni quendam, qui habebat cruciculam de atramento super manum suam. Vnde credidi quod esset Christianus: quia ad omnia quæ querebam ab eo, respondebat vt Christianus. Vnde quæsiui ab eo: Quare ergo non habetis crucem et imaginem Iesu Christi? Et ipse respondit, non habemus consuetudinem. Vnde ego credidi quod essent Christiani: sed ex defectu doctrinæ omitterent. Videbam enim ibi post quandam cistam, quæ erat eis loco altaris, super quam ponunt lucernas et oblationes, quandam imaginationem habentem alas quasi Sancti Michaelis: et alias quasi ipsorum tenentes digitos sicut ad benedieendum. Illo sero non potui aliud inuenire. Quia Saraceni in tantum inuitant eos, quod nec etiam volunt loqui inde eis. Vnde quando quærebam à Saracenis de ritu talium, ipsi scandalizabantur. In crastino fuerunt kalendæ et pascha Saracenoram et mutaui hospitium: ita quod fui hospitatus prope aliam Idolatriam. Homines enim colligunt nuncios, quilibet secundum posse suum vel portionem suam. Tunc intrans Idolatriam prædictam inueni sacerdotes Idolorum. In kalendis enim aperiunt templa sua, et ornant se sacerdotes, et offerunt populi oblationes de pane et fructibus. [Iugures secta diuisa ab alijs Idolatris.] Primò ergo describo vobis ritus communes omnes Idolatrarum: et postea istorum Iugurum; qui sunt quasi secta diuisa ab alijs. Omnes adorant ad Aquilonem complosis manibus: et prosternentes se genibus flexis ad terram, ponentes frontem super manus. Vnde Nestorini in partibus illis nullo modo iungunt manus orando: sed orant extensis palmis ante pectus. Porrigunt templa sua ab Oriente in Occidentem: et in latere Aquilonari faciunt cameram vnam quasi eorum exeuntem: vel aliter, Si est domus quadrati, in medio domus ad latus aquilonare intercludunt vnam cameram in loco chori. Ibi ergo collocant vnam arcam longam et latam sicut mensam vnam. [Fuit apud Caracarum frater Wilhelmus.] Et post illam arcam contra meridiem collocant principale idolum: quod ego vidi apud Caracarum, ita magnum sicut pingitur Sanctus Christopherus. Et dixit mihi quidam sacerdos Nestorinus, qui venerat ex Cataya, quod in terra illa est Idolum ita magnum, quod potest videri a duabus dietis. Et collocant alia idola in circuitu, omnia pulcherrime deaurata: Super cistam illam, quæ est quasi mensa vna, ponunt lucernas et oblationes. Omnes portæ templorum sunt apertæ ad meridiem contrario modo Saracenis. Item habent campanas magnas sicut nos. Ideo credo quod orientales Christiani noluerunt habere eas. Ruteni tamen habent et Græci in Gasaria.
De templis eorum et idolis, et qualiter se habent in officio deorum suorum. Cap. 27.
Omnes sacerdotes eorum rasum habent totum caput et barbam; sunt vestiti de croceo, et seruant castitatem, ex quo radunt caput: et viuunt pariter centum vel ducenti in vna congregatione. Diebus quibus intrant templum, ponunt duo scamna, et sedent è regione chorus contra chorum habentes libros in manibus, quos aliquando deponunt super illa scamna: et habent capita discooperta quandiu insunt in templo, legentes in silencio, et tenentes silencium. Vnde cum ingressus fuissem apud Oratorium quoddam eorum, et inuenissem eos ita sedentes, multis modis tentaui eos prouocare ad verba, et nullo modo potui. Habent etiam quocunque vadunt quendam restem centum vel ducentorum nucleorum, sicut nos portamus pater noster: Et dicunt semper hæc verba: Ou mam Hactani: hoc est, Deus tu nosti; secundum quod quidem eorum interpretatus est mihi. Et toties expectant remunerationem à Deo, quoties hoc dicendo memoratur Dei. Circa templum suum semper faciunt pulchrum atrium, quod bene includunt muro: et ad meridiem faciunt portam magnam, in qua sedent ad colloquendum. Et super illam portam erigunt perticam longam, quæ emineat si possint, super totam villam. Et per illam perticam potest cognosci, quod domus illa sit templum Idolorum. Ista communia sunt omnibus Idolatris. Quando ergo ingressus fui prædictam Idolatriam, inueni sacerdotes sedentes sub porta exteriori. Illi quos vidi, videbantur mihi fratres Franci esse rasis barbis. [Tyaræ cartaceæ.] Tyaras habebant in capitibus cartaceas. Istorum Iugurum sacerdotes habent talem habitum quocunque vadunt: semper sunt in tunicis croceis satis strictis accincti desuper recte sicut Franci: et habent pallium super humerum sinistrum descendens inuolutum per pectus et dorsum ad latus dextrum sicut diaconus portans casulam in quadragesima. Istorum literas acceperunt Tartari. [Chinenses ita etiam scribunt.] Ipsi incipiunt scribere sursum, et ducunt lineam deorsum, et, eodem modo ipsi legunt et multiplicant lineas a sinistra ad dextram. [Sortilegi.] Isti multum vtuntur cartis et caracteribus pro sortilegio. Vnde templa sua plena sunt breuibus suspensis. Et Mangu-cham mittit vobis literas in idiomate Moal et literatura eorum. [Combustio mortuorum.] Isti comburunt mortuos suos secundum antiquum modum, et recondunt puluerem in summitate pyramidis. Cum ergo sedissem iuxta prædictos sacerdotes postquam ingressus fueram templum et vidissem idola eorum multa magna et parua: quæsiui ab eis quid ipsi crederent de Deo. Qui responderunt, Non credimus nisi vnum Deum. Et ego quæsiui: Creditis quod ipse sit spiritus vel aliquid corporale? Dixerunt, credimus quod sit spiritus. Et ego: Creditis quod nunquam sumpserit humanam naturam: Dixerunt, minime. Tunc ego: ex quo creditis, quod non sit nisi vnus spiritus, quare facitis ei imagines corporales et tot insuper? Ex quo non creditis quod factus sit homo, quare facitis ei magis imagines hominum, quàm alterius animalis? Tunc responderunt, Nos non figuramus istas imagines Deo. Sed quando aliquis diues moritur ex nostris, vel filius, vel vxor, vel aliquis charus eius facit fieri imaginem defuncti, et ponit eam hic: et nos veneramur eam ad memoriam eius. Quibus ego, Tunc ergo non facitis ista nisi propter adulationem hominum. Immo dixerunt ad memoriam. Tunc quæsiuerunt à me quasi deridendo: vbi est Deus? Quibus ego, Vbi est anima vestra? Dixerunt, in corpore nostro. Quibus ego, Nonne est vbique in corpore tuo et totum regit, et tamen non videtur? Ita Deus vbique est, et omnia gubernat, inuisibilis tamen, quia intellectus et sapientia est. Tunc cum vellem plura ratiocinari cum illis, interpres meus fatigatus non valens verba exprimere, fecit me tacere. Istorum sectæ sunt Moal siue Tartari, quantum ad hoc, quod ipsi non credunt nisi vnum Deum: tamen faciunt de filtro imagines defunctorum suorum, et induunt eas quinque pannis preciosissimis, et ponunt in vna biga vel duabus, et illas bigas nullus audet tangere: et sunt sub custodia diuinatorum suorum, qui sunt eorum sacerdotes, de quibus postea narrabo vobis. Isti diuinatores semper sunt ante curiam ipsius Mangu et aliorum diuitum: pauperes enim non habent eos; nisi illi qui sunt de genere Chingis. Et cum debent bigare, ipsi præcedunt, sicut columna nubis filios Isræl, et ipsi considerant locum metandi castra, et post deponunt domos suas; et post eos tota curia. Et tunc cum sit dies festus siue kalendæ ipsi extrahunt prædictas imagines et ponunt eas ordinate per circuitum in domo sua. Tunc veniunt Moal et ingrediuntur domum illam, et inclinant se imaginibus illis et venerantur illas. Et illam domum nemini ingredi extraneo licet: Quadam enim vice volui ingredi et multum dure increpatus fui.
De diuersis nationibus, et de illis qui comedere solebant parentes suos. Cap. 28.
Prædicti vero Iugures, qui sunt mixti cum Christianis et Saracenis, per frequentes disputationes, vt credo, peruenerunt ad hoc, quod non credunt nisi vnum deum. Et isti fuerunt habitantes in ciuitatibus, qui post obediuerunt Chingis Cham: vnde ipse dedit regi eorum filiam suam. [Patria Presbiter Iohannis.] Et ipsa Caracarum est quasi in territorio eorum: Et tota terra regis siue presbyteri Iohannis et Vut fratris eius circa terras eorum; Sed isti in pascuis ad aquilonem, illi Iugures inter montes ad meridiem. Inde est quod ipsi Moal sumpserunt literas eorum. Et ipsi sunt magni scriptores eorum: et omnes fere Nestorim sciunt literas eorum. [Tangut populi fortissimi.] Post istos sunt ipsi Tangut ad orientem inter montes illos, homines fortissimi, qui ceperunt Chingis in bello. Et pace facta dimissis ab eis, postea subiugauit eos. [Boues pilosis caudis: his similes sunt in Quinera Americæ septentrionalis prouincia.] Isti habent boues fortissimos habentes caudas plenas pilis sicut equi, et ventres pilosos et dorsa. Bassiores sunt alijs bobus in tibijs, sed ferociores multum. Isti trahunt magnas domos Moallorum: et habent cornua gracilia, longa, acuosa, acutissima: ita quod oportet semper secare summitates eorum. Vacca non permittit se iniungi nisi cantetur ei. Habent etiam naturam bubali quia si vident hominem indutum rubeis, insiliunt in eum volentes interficere. [Sidenote: Tebet populi.] Post illos sunt Tebet homines solentes comedere parentes suos defunctos, vt causa pietatis non facerent aliud sepulchrum eis nisi viscera sua. Modo tamen hoc dimiserunt, quia abominabiles erant omni nationi. Tamen adhuc faciunt pulcros ciphos de capitibus parentum, vt illis bibentes habeant memoriam eorum in iocunditate sua. Hoc dixit mihi qui viderat. Isti habent multum de auro in terra sua. [Auri Abundantia.] Vnde qui indiget auro, fodit donec reperiat, et accipiat quando indiget, residuum condens in terra: quia si reponeret in arca vel in thesauro, crederet quod Deus auferret ei aliud quod est in terra. De istis hominibus vidi personas multum deformes. [Tangut homines magni sed fusci.] Tangut vidi homines magnos sed fuscos. Iugures sunt mediocris staturæ sicut nostri. Apud Iugures est fons et radix ideomatis Turci et Comanici. [Langa et Solanga.] Post Tebet sunt Langa et Solanga, quorum nuncios vidi in curia: Qui adduxerant magnas bigas plusquam decem, quarum quælibet trahebatur sex bobus. [Solanisimiles Hispanis, et fusci.] Isti sunt parui homines et fusci sicut Hispani: et habent tunicas sicut supertunicale diaconi manicis parum strictioribus: et habent in capitibus mitras sicut episcopi. Sed pars anterior est parum interior quàm posterior, et non terminatur in vnum angulum: sed sunt quadræ desuper, et sunt de stramine rigidato per calorem magnum, et limato in tantum, quod fulget ad radium solis sicut speculum vel galea bene burnita. Et circa tempora habent longas bendas de eadem materia assutas ipsi mitræ; quæ se extendunt ad ventum sicut duo cornua egredientia de temporibus. Et quando ventus nimis iactat eas plicant eas per medium mitræ superius à tempore in tempus: et iacent sicut circulus ex transuerso capitis. [Sidenote: Tabula de elephantino.] Et principalis nuncius quando veniebat ad curiam, habebat tabulam de dente elephantino ad longitudinem vnius cubiti, et ad latitudinem vnius palmi, rasam multum: Et quandocunque loquebatur ipsi Cham, vel alicui magno viro, semper aspiciebat in illam tabulam, ac si inueniret ibi ea quæ dicebat: nec respiciebat ad dextram vel sinestram, nec in faciem illius cui loquebatur. Etiam accedens coram domino et recedens nusquam respicit nisi in tabulam suam. [Muc populi.] Vltra istos sunt alij homines, vt intellexi pro vero, qui dicuntur Muc, qui habent villas, sed nulla animalia sibi appropriant: tamen sunt multi greges et multa armenta in terra ipsorum, et nullos custodit ea. Sed cum aliquis indiget aliquo, ascendit collem et clamat, et omnia animalia audientia clamorem accedunt circa illum, et permittunt se tractari quasi domestica. Et si nuncius vel aliquis extraneus accedat ad regionem illam, ipsi includunt eum in domo, et ministrant ei necessaria, donec negocium eius fuerit expeditum. Quia si iret extraneus per regionem, animalia ad odorem eius fugerent, et efficerentur syluestria. [Magna Cathaya.] Vltra est magna Cathaya, cuius incolæ antiquitus vt credo dicebantur Seres. Ab ipsis enim veniunt optimi panni serici. Et ille populus dicitur Seres a quodam oppido eorum. Bene intellexi, quod in illa regione est oppidum habens muros argenteos et propugnacula aurea. In ista terra sunt multæ prouinciæ, quarum plures adhuc non obediunt Moallis. Et inter

Buddh- goes global

For those with the bug, I found this little handout really useful.


FROM:
Instructor: Professor Vyacheslav V. Ivanov
The UCLA Program in Indo-European Studies/ a Winter 2001 seminar
Indo-European Studies 280A (Seminar: Indo-European Linguistics):
INTRODUCTION TO CENTRAL ASIAN BUDDHIST
TEXTS AND TERMINOLOGY
(Buddhist Sanskrit, Kroraini Prakrit, Tocharian A and B, Old Turkic=
Uigur, Tibetan, Sogdian, Khotanese and Murtuq Saka, Bactrian)


I. Names of Buddha
A. Sanskrit (Skt) Buddha —enlightened, awakened one; buddha“
1. Historical Buddha Siddhārtha Gautama
2. An epithet of those who successfully break the hold of ignorance,
liberate themselves from cyclic existence, and teach others the path to
liberation
Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit (BH Skt) Buddha —an Enlightened one“
(Edgerton, F.E. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary, vol.2.
Dictionary. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1953, p.400)
A 1. Skt Buddha : etymology
Skt budh- —to awaken“ (verbal root) +-ta- (a suffix of a Past Partciple)>
buddha- —awakened=enlightened, wise“.
The meaning ”to wake“, —to awake“ is attested in Rgveda (RV), for
instance in connection to Dawns in the hymn IV, 51, 8 and 10 (in 10 in a
combination prati-+ budh- —to awake towards“, cf. Skt prati-+ bodh-a/
BH Skt prati-+ bodh-i —realization, compensation“). In Nuristani (Nur)) the
same meaning is seen in Waigali(Wg) buj-—to wake“, but the nouns as
büdü, büt —mind, intention“, Kati (Kt) bidī —mind“ show the general
intellectual meaning maybe due to an Indo-Aryan influence (see on
Nuristani and Modern Indo-Aryan forms: R.L. Turner. Comparative
Dictionary of the Indo-Aryan Languages, 1989, p. 525).
Indo-European (I-E) root * bheudh- probably meant —to be awake= not
to sleep, to awaken“: this meaning is shared by Baltic (Lithuanian[Lith]
budėti —to be awake“, bùdinti ) and Slavic (Old Church Slavonic [OCS]
buditi —to awaken“). Grassmann (Wörterbuch zum Rig-Veda,Leipzig, 1873,
p. 907) has stated that the main meaning is —to wake, to awaken“ as seen in
Rgveda and Balto-Slavic; the other meanings as he suggested could be
deduced from this one (the idea is repeated in several recent dictionaries,
but there are opposite suggestions). But in Avestan the meaning —to wake“
Page 2
2
has been preserved only in a (common I-E) combination with a preverb
*pro-> fra- (Bartholomae, Altiranisches Wörterbuch, p. 918); the general
meaning of the verb is —sentire“ (to perceive, to have different kinds of
perceptions or feelings). In Slavic the general meaning —to observe, to pay
attention to“ is also attested in such forms as OCS bljudoN —I watch“.
A meaning — to be aware, to make aware, to get information, to
understand‘ is reconstructed on the base of Skt bódhati —observe,
understand“ (also —wake“) and Avestan (Av) baoδayeiti —indicate“ and a
cognate Homeric Greek (HGk) πεύθ−ο−µαι
θ−ο−µαι
θ−ο−µαι
θ−ο−µαι —learn by inquiry, ascertain,
hear“, Gk —examine, experience“ (in Greek as in Indo-Iranian the sequence
*bh… dh is dissimilated according to Grassmann‘s law giving Indian
b…dh, Gk π..θ
π..θ
π..θ
π..θ). In Indo-Iranian (I-I) and Gk thematic verbal forms of this
root are identical and can be traced back to Eastern I-E protoforms.
According to Porzig (Die Gliederung d. Indo-germanischen
Sprachgebiets, 1954) in the Western I-E dialects- in Germanic and Celtic a
semantic shift —awake, observe“>“point out, warn“>“order“ can be
supposed: Gothic (Goth) ana-biudan —order, command“, Old English (OE)
on-bēodan —order, proclaim“, Goth faur-biudan —forbid“, OE for-bēodan
—to forbid“> Modern English (ME) (to) forbid, Old High German (OHG)
far-biotan> Modern German verboten; OE bēodan —to proclaim“> ME
(to) bid, OE boda ”messenger‘, bodian ”to announce‘> ME bode; OE bydel
”messenger, herald‘>ME beadle; ONorse bo¦ ”order, command, message‘;
Old Irish ro-bud —warning, advice“, as-boind —refuse“; semantic
developments leading to a legal semantic field in Gk dialects (such as
Cretan) and in Lith are considered to be parallel although they may point to
an ancient social use of the root. Tocharian (Toch) A pot<*pout, B paut-
—honor, flatter“ has been compared by several scholars to the same root, but
semantic connection (*—to pay attention“> —to flatter“?) is not clear and there
is a possibility that Tocharian terms go back to an Iranian borrowing,
although their phonetic shape may be seen as speaking for an I-E origin.
A 2.Translations and variants of the name Buddha:
Pali Buddha
Middle Indo-Aryan language of the inscriptions of Aśoka Budhe,
Singhalese Bud(u)-, But-
Tocharian A ptā(-)ñkät/ pättā(-)ñkät —Buddha-(god)“
Tocharian B pud(-)ñäkte —Buddha-(god)“ (poetic), prose form pañäkte
Sogdian pwty
Murtuq Saka bārsa-, Saka Khotanese balysä (-lys-<*-rz-)
Tibetan saʼns rgyas
Page 3
3
Chinese fo <*bvur (<*bud-)
Old Turkic burxan, furxan (b/furJapanese butsu
Tocharian had borrowed the name before the shift of all the stop
consonants to the voiceless class. Also the non-stressed reduced u had
coincided with the non-labial neutral vowel in the allegro coloquial forms in
both the languages and later was lost in some forms in Tocharian B.
Although the consonants in the Sogdian form are identical to those in
Tocharian it should not be necessarily explained by a Tocharian influence
(or the influence of Kroraini prakrit that reflected a similar phonological
pattern as ProtoTocharian). Tocharian (including also the dialect that had
been a sustrate of Kroraini prakrit) had merged all the stops into the
voiceless class while Sogdian shifted the voiced stops to fricatives
(spirants): *b>β.
Tocharian A ptā(-)ñkät/ pättā(-)ñkät —Buddha-(god)“ and Tocharian B
pud(-)ñäkte —Buddha-(god)“ (poetic), prose form pañäkte are compounds
with the second element having the meaning —god‘. Such compounds in
Tocharian usually render Indian names of the gods that might be used in
combination with Skt deva-”god‘. (BH) Skt deva buddha —Buddha-(god)“
corresponds to Tocharian names of Buddha as well as to such constructions
with the formula —god of the gods“ as
Toch A ñäkt-aśśi pätā(-)ññäkt-es —Buddha-(god) , the god of the gods“,
Toch B ñäktem=nts ñäkte pud(-)ñäkte —Buddha-god, the god of the gods“,
ñikteñ ñikte —the god of gods“.
This type is present also in :
Sogdian bγ‘nbγtm pwty —Buddha (pwty), the most divine of the gods‘
(Vessantara Jātaka. Texte sogdien.Ed. E. Benveniste. Paris, 1946, pp. 84-85,
lines 1472, 1498, 1500, 1503: in this Sogdian Buddhist text the name of
Buddha is used only in this combination repeated 4 times in a final passage);
Saka Khotanese gyastānu gyastä- gyastänu gyastibalysi —Buddha, the god
of the gods“
Old Turkic (Uigur) tŋgri tŋgrusi burxan —Buddha, the god of the gods“,
Bactrian Ýαουαυ Ýαο —the god of gods“ (the title of the king Kanishka on
the Kushan coins)= Prakrit rajati rajaja —the king of the kings“ in the
trilingual inscription from Afghanistan.
Page 4
4
Tibetan saʼns rgyas
is derived from the stem of the verb
o
tsáʼn-ba II perf. saʼns :
o
tsáʼn-rgyá-bar
o
gyúr-ba —to become Buddha“,
o
tsáʼn-rgyá-bar
o
dód-pa —to aim at Buddhaship“, saʼns rgyas —(having
become) Buddha“ (H.A. Jashke —A Tibetan-English Dictionary“, Delhi 1987
reprint, pp.457-458 with further semantic hypotheses on the original
meaning in Tibetan).
B. Sanskrit Siddhārtha Gautama
Pali Siddhattha Gotama
cf. Tocharian A Gautam, Siddhārthe
cf. Tocharian B Gautamäññe/ Gotamñe —belonging to Gautama“,
Siddhārthe
Tibetan Don-grub Gaú-ta-ma (Jaschke ib., p. 571)
the given name of Śākyamuni Buddha
C.Sanskrit Śākyamuni Buddha
Pali Sakkamuni
Tocharian A Śākyamuni
Tocharian B Śākyamuni, śakkeññe rşāke
Tibetan Śā-kya t‘ub- pa (Jashke, p.571)
Chinese Shih-cha-mo-ni
Japanese Shaka Nyorai
Vietnamese Thích-Ca Phâąt-Đài
—sage of the Śākyas“
The historical Buddha whose name at birth was Siddhārtha Gautama. He
belonged to the Śākya clan.
A 3. Sanskrit bodhi
Pali bodhi
Tibetan byang- čúb ”the highest perfection and holiness‘ (Jashke, p. 374)
Chinese p‘u -t‘i
Japanese bodai
—awakening“ from the sleep of ignorance in which most beings spend theit
lives
According to the Buddhist tradition Siddhārtha Gautama, the historical
Buddha attained this state in the town of Bodhgaya while sitting in
meditation under the Bodhi tree (Bodhi-vŗkşa)
Page 5
5
A4.Skt Bodhi-vŗkşa
Pali Bodhi-rukkha
Tibetan byang- čúb-śíng
—Tree of awakening“
The holy fig tree (ficus religiosa, cf. Skt aśvattha) in Bodhgaya under
which Siddhārtha Gautama, the historical Buddha, attained complete
enlightment.
D. Sanskrit tathāgata-
Pāli tathāgata-
Tocharian A tämne-wäknā kakmu
Tibetan de bzhin gsegs pa
— thus-gone-one“
An epithet of buddhas, which signifies their attainment of awakening bodhi
Sanskrit tathāgata-garbha
Pāli tathāgata-
Tibetan de bzhin gsegs pa‘i snying po
Chinese ju-lai tsang
—embryo of the tathāgata“= —containing buddhahood within itself“
= the innate potential of buddhahood that is present in all beings.
Mahāyana concept to the effect that the Buddha in the form of his
dharma-kaya body , who is identical to the ultimate reality, dwells in all
sentient beings
Page 6
6
II. Three characteristics
Skt tri-lakşana-
Pali ti-lakkhana
Tibetan mt‘san-nyid γsum
—the 3 (Tib. γsum= Skt tri-) marks“
1. Skt duhkha-
Pali dukkha
Tibetan sdug bsngal
Chinese k‘u
—suffering, unsatisfactoriness“
2.Skt anitya-
Pali anicca
Tibetan mi rtág- pa (Jashke, p.212)
”impermanence‘= —non-durable“
3. Skt an-ātman
Pali an-attā
Tibetan bdag med
Chinese wu-wo
—no-soul“
Skt an-ātman: etymology
Skt an-
Skt ātman —soul“:
I-E *Hot- —to blow, To breathe, to have a breathing stuff inside“
German Atem
Hittite hatt-atar —soul“ (=Hurrian mat-i)
Page 7
7
III. Skt dharma-
Pāli dhamma
Tocharian A märkampal
Tocharian B pelaikne
Tibetan chos
Chinese fa
Japanese hō or datsuma
—doctrine, truth“
a general term referring to Buddhist doctrine and practice; in this meaning it
is one of the —three jewels“ (Skt tri-ratna-) or —three refuges“ (tri-śarana-)
on which Buddhisn relies (the others being the Buddha and Sangha)
abhi-dharma-
philosophic and scholastic treatises that codify and systematize doctrines
expressed in the sūtra literature
Sanskrit abhi-dharma-
Tibetan chos mngon —higher doctrine“
Chinese A p‘i ta mo
Japanese Abi datsuma
Page 8
8
IV. Sanskrit (Skt) skandha-
Pāli khandha
Tocharian B ānts-e (Pl œi), also —shoulder“, -skant (in rūpa-skant)
Tibetan phung po
—group, aggregate, heap“
V.Skt nirvāna
Pali nibbāna
Tocharian A, B nervām=n
Tibetan mya ngan las ”das pa
Jap nehan
—cessationPage 9
9
VI. Sanskrit (Skt) dhyāna
Pāli ch'an-na
Tocharian A plyaskem/ņ
Tocharian B ompalskoññe
Tibetan bsam gtan
Chinese ch'an-na/ ch'an
Japanese zenna/ zen
Korean sŏn
Vietnamese thiè/ên
”concentration, meditation, meditative absorption‘
In Theravada meditative literature, this refers to four meditative states that
lead to elimination of defilements (Sanskrit āsrava -
Pāli āsava
defilement)
Sanskrit āsrava -
Pāli āsava
defilement
VII. Sanskrit (Skt) dhātu
Pāli dhātu
Tocharian A dhātu
Tocharian B dhātu
Tibetan khams
—realm, element, sphere“
VIII. Sanskrit āyatana
Pāli āyatana
Tocharian A āyatam=n
Tocharian B āyatam=n
Tibetan skye mched
Page 10
10
Chinese ch‘u
«sense sphere
»
The six abodes of perception or sensation
IX. Sanskrit rūpa
Pāli rūpa
Tocharian A rūp
Tocharian B rū/up, rūpa- (in rūpa-skant)
Sanskrit rūpa-dhātu (=rūpa-loka)
Tocharian A rūpa-dhātu
Tocharian B rūpa-dhātu
Tibetan gZugs khams
—Form Realm“ —sphere of desireless corporeality or form“
X. Sanskrit smŗtyupasthāna-
Pāli sati- paţţhāna
Tocharian A smŗtyupasthām=n
Tocharian B smŗtyupasthām=n
Tibetan dran pa nye bar gzhag pa
—establishment of mindfulness“

Saturday, May 3, 2008

In the Beginning, Sanskrit, then John




for those without the language of the gods:

In the beginning there was vaada [which does not simply mean 'speech, perhaps: 'discourse'?], and the vaada was 'on all fours' [idiomatic, for abhimukha] with Lord (or, God), and the vaada was Lord...


(no definite articles in Sanskrit).

For those with time, such a document would be fun to study in light of Indian classical texts. For example, adau, sets us off on the right note, for many creation stories in the Brahmanas might begin like this, (though I think statistics would show they prefer 'agre'...). But then you get 'vaada', which is a bit off a googly. Why not vaac? Too 'animate'? Or too many squatters on that concept--I mean, one wants to communicate, but one also wants a reason why, given that the Ganges has flown on as long as the Jordan, why we should listen to these whippersnapper Greeks--with their curious neo platonisms.
'abhimukha' is, however, grand. Simply grand. For example, consult for initial gloss:

1 abhimukha mf(%{I} , rarely %{A})n. with the face directed towards , turned towards , facing (with acc. dat. gen. ; or ifc.) ; (ifc.) going near , approaching (as %{yauvanA7bhimukhI} , `" approaching puberty , marriageable "' Pan5cat.) ; (ifc.) disposed to , intending to , ready for ; taking one's part , friendly disposed (with gen. or instr.) R. ; (%{am}) ind. towards (often used in a hostile manner Kir. vi , 14 , &c.) , in the direction of , in front or presence of , near to (acc. gen. ; or ifc.) ; (%{e}) ind. in front or presence of (gen. ; or ifc.) R. ; (%{I}) f. one of the ten Bhu1mis to be passed by a Bodhisattva , before becoming a Buddha.

Usually, a word you find in connection with 'squaring up to' what is the case.

You could say more. But not a bad term to gloss the curious homo-ousias but yet not homo-personas etc--you know, all those reasons why non christians are nervous about recognizing in christian dogma monotheism.

Chin-Chin, and such


CHIN-CHIN . In the "pigeon English" of Chinese ports this signifies 'salutation, compliments,' or 'to salute,' and is much used by Englishmen as slang in such senses. It is a corruption of the Chinese phrase ts'ingts'ing, Pekingese ch'ing-ch'ing, a term of salutation answering to 'thank-you,' 'adieu.' In the same vulgar dialect chin-chin joss means religious worship of any kind (see JOSS). It is curious that the phrase occurs in a quaint story told to William of Rubruck by a Chinese priest whom he met at the Court of the Great Kaan (see below). And it is equally remarkable to find the same story related with singular closeness of correspondence out of "the Chinese books of Geography" by Francesco Carletti, 350 years later (in 1600). He calls the creatures Zinzin (Ragionamenti di F. C., pp. 138-9).

1253. -- "One day there sate by me a cer- tain priest of Cathay, dressed in a red cloth of exquisite colour, and when I asked him whence they got such a dye, he told me how in the eastern parts of Cathay there were lofty cliffs on which dwelt certain creatures in all things partaking of human form, except that their knees did not bend. . . . The huntsmen go thither, taking very strong beer with them, and make holes in the rocks which they fill with this beer. . . . Then they hide themselves and these creatures come out of their holes and taste the liquor, and call out 'Chin Chin.'" -- Itinerarium, in Rec. de Voyages, &c., iv. 328.


CHOP-CHOP . Pigeon-English (or -Chinese) for 'Make haste! look sharp!' This is supposed to be from the Cantonese, pron. kăp-kăp, of what is in the Mandarin dialect kip-kip. In the Northern dialects kwai-kwai, 'quick-quick' is more usual (Bishop Moule). [Mr. Skeat compares the Malay chepat-chepat, 'quick-quick.']

Recipe no. 94 (Purdy Curdy)

1. Lotus Roots, of above 1" diameter 1 kg


that's right.

2. Mustard oil 1 cup
3. Curd 1 kg
4. Milk 1 cup
5. Cloves 3 nos
6. Cumin Seeds 1 tsp
7. Asafoetida a pinch
8. Ginger Powder 1 tsp
9. Aniseed Powder 2 tsps
10. Black Pepper Powder 1 tsp
11. Black Cardamom Powder 1/2 tsp
12. Cinnamon Powder 1/2 tsp
13. Caraway seeds 1/2 tsp
14. 'Garam Masala' 1 tsp
15. Salt about 1 tsp
16. Sugar 1/2 tsp
17. Green Cardamoms a few
Preparation
Scrape the Lotus Roots with a knife and cut off root heads, and any bad ends of the stalks. Cut horizontally, into about 2" pieces. Wash thoroughly to clean the outside, and remove mud etc. from the holes of the pieces.
Method of Cooking
1. In an earthenware pot ('Leij'), or in a steel or tinned copper or brass 'Patila', boil, for half an hour, the prepared Lotus Root pieces, in enough water to keep these immersed wholly during boiling. To save time, only 5 to 10 minutes of pressure cooking is enough. Take out with a perforated ladle or strain through a colander, the boiled pieces, and retain the Soup in a steel bowl, and let it cool.

2. Add to the Soup the Curd, Milk, Aniseed and Ginger Powders, Sugar and Salt, and blend the ingredients, by churning with a small churn--stick (H- 'Biloni), to a Curdy Sauce.

3. Now, in the cooking vessel, heat the oil on a medium flame, till foam disappears. Add the Cloves, Cumin Seeds and Asafoetida. Stir with a steel ladle, and add immediately the prepared Sauce. Continue stirring with the steel ladle, so that Curd does not crack, till the Sauce comes to a boil.

4. Add boiled Lotus Root pieces, and let these cook on a low heat, for another 15 to 20 minutes, turning these now and then with the ladle. When the Curdy Gravy thickens, add Caraway Seeds and Cardamom, Cinnamon and Black Pepper Powders, along with the 'Garam Masala'. Mix the Spices by stirring with the ladle. A few crushed Green Cardamoms may be added.

'Nadier (plural for nadru) Yakhean' is ready for serving.

For Dissertators (In the Kali Age)

Dear Wife, Please do not buy this...

Tintin in (Chinese) Tibet (for Daniel)



Apart from merry orientalism, we now have this:

"when the first official editions of Tintin books in mainland China were published exactly a year ago, the author's widow was aghast to see translators had changed the title of "Tintin in Tibet" to "Tintin in Chinese Tibet".

Although the book does not even mention Tibet's political status, Beijing is always keen to stress its claims over the Himalayan region it has ruled, at times brutally, for the past half-century.

Fanny Remy, the widow of Tintin author Herge, protested to Belgian publishers Casterman, who in turn refused to allow the book to be re-printed with the modified title, which they had initially approved."

A Dialogue (Post Colonial)



Cast
of
Characters:
(1) Elderly Gentleman, English (one imagines him named Edgar, or something similarly imposing). Waistcoat. Blue. Jacket, dinner. Blue. Portly. Not without Presence. Voice, worthy of the highest reaches of government. British. Educated: at one of the two universities, Oxford or Cambridge. Favorite drink, presumably port.

(2) Myself. Dinner Jacket. Black. Frayed at one elbow. Shoes: black, with a hole on the sole, and uneven. Bleary eyed. An ink stained hand, from copying down references.

Where: Seminary Co-Op Bookstore. When, Over the weekend. But Any given Weekend.


Gentleman: (Harumph--that certain sound they make). I cannot now seem to recall where this book goes. Steiner, you see, his latest. And I only just picked it up.

Me: I seem to remember it being here, sir. Around this corner.

Gentleman: Yes, Yes. Do you work here?

Me: No sir. I just read the Steiner this afternoon. Not his best, I thought.

Gentleman: Well. Well, (harumph) You sound...are you English.

(Pause, as I place the book back on the shelf for him).

Me: Well, not since 1947 sir. Good afternoon Sir.

....





First image: Letter about the pepper trade written in 1710 by the East India Company to the British monarch
(Catalogue ref: SP 34/30/68)

wifey

Introducing his good self


‘The name is H. Hatterr, and I am continuing…

Biologically, I am fifty-fifty of the species.

One of my parents was a European,

Christian-by-faith merchant merman (seaman). From which part of the Continent? Wish I could tell you. The other was an Oriental, a Malay Peninsula-resident lady, a steady non-voyaging, non-Christian human (no mermaid). From which part of the Peninsula? Couldn’t tell you either.

Barely a ye
ar after my baptism (in white, pure and holy), I was taken from Penang (Malay P.) to India (East). It was there that my old man kicked the bucket in a hurry. The via media? Chronic malaria and pneumonia-plus.

Whereupon, a local litigation for my possession ensued.

The odds were all in favour of the India-resident Dundee-born Scot, who was trading in jute.

He believed himself a good European, and a pious Kirk o’ Scotland parishioner, whose right-divine Scotch blud mission it was to rescue the baptised mite me from any illiterate non-pi heathen influence. She didn’t have a chance, my poor old ma, and the court gave him the possession award.

I don’t know what happened to her. Maybe, she lives. Who cares?

Rejoicing at the just conclusion of the dictate of his conscience, and armed with the legal interpretation of the testament left by my post-mortem seaman parent, willing I be brought up Christian, and the court custody award, the jute factor had me adopted by an English Missionary Society, as one of their many Oriental and mixed-Oriental orphan-wards. And, thus it was that I became a sahib by adoption, the Christian lingo (English) being my second vernacular from the orphan-adoption age onwards.

The E.M. Society looked after me till the age of fourteen or thereabouts.

It was then that I found the constant childhood preoccupation with the whereabouts of my mother unbearable, the religious routine unsuited to my temperament, the evangelical stuff beyond my ken, and Rev. the Head (of the Society’s school), M.A., D.Litt., D.D., also C.B.E., ex-Eton and Cantab. (Moths, Grates, and Home Civ), Protor par excellence, Feller of the Royal Geographical, Astronomical and Asiastic Societies (and a writer!), too much of a stimulus for my particular orphan constitution. (The sort of loco parentis who’d shower on you a penny, and warn you not to squander it on woman, and wine, and
song!)



“Help others! Help others!” he used to say. Knowing that the most deserving party needing help was self, I decided to chuck the school, get out into the open spaces of India, seek my lebansraum, and win my bread and curry all on my own.

And one warm Indian autumn night, I bolted as planned, having pinched, for voluntary study, an English dictionary, the Rev. the Head’s own-authored 'Latin Self-Taught' and 'French Self-Taught', the Missionary Society’s school stereoscope complete with slides (my second love after my mother) and sufficient Missionary funds lifted from the Head’s pocket to see me through life.

From that day onwards, my education became free and my own business. I fought off the hard-clinging feelings of my motherlessness. I studied the daily press, picked up tips from the stray Indian street-dog as well as the finest Preceptor-Sage available in the land. I assumed the style-name H. Hatterr (‘H’ for the nom de plume ‘Hindustaaniwalla’, and ‘Hatterr’, the nom de guerre inspired by Rev. the Head’s too-large-for-him-hat), and, by and by (autobiographical I, which see), I went completely Indian to an extent few pure non-Indian blood sahib fellers have done.

I have learnt from the school of Life; all the lessons, the sweet, the bitter, and the middling messy. I am debtor both to the Greeks and the Barbarians. And, pardon, figuratively speaking, I have had higher education too. I have been the personal disciple of the illustrious grey-beards, the Sages of Calcutta, Rangoon (now resident in India), Madras, Bombay, and the right Honourable the Sage of Delhi, the wholly Worshipful of Mogalsarai-Varanasi, and his naked Holiness Number One, the Sage of All India himself!’ (pg. 31-33).
-------------------------------------------

But Desani’s 'meteque-masala-Hindustaaniwala' English
is by no means due to any lack of proficiency in the English language (as Burgess has already pointed out): in the forties, Desani received high praise in Britain not only for his writing, but also for his oratory. Throughout World War II, Desani lived in England where he lectured widely and was a speaker sponsored by the British Ministry of Information, broadcasting for the BBC (incidentally, at the Ministry, he worked with Eric Blair, better known as George Orwell, who chided him for writing a novel during the war—for it was during the war that H. Hatterr was born).

Desani was born in 1909 in Nairobi, Kenya of Sindhi [Indian] parentage. After the war, he went to Burma and India where, for the next 14 years, he studied Sanskrit, philosophy, Buddhism and the occult; practised raja-yoga and meditation under the guidance of gurus, travelling as far away as Japan for specialised instruction. During the mid-‘60s, he regularly contributed to the "Illustrated Weekly of India". He emigrated to the USA in the 1970s to teach at Boston University and later at the University of Texas at Austin, as Professor Emeritus of religion and philosophy.

Aside from 'All About H. Hatterr', his only other published work is '‘Hali’ & Collected Stories' ['Hali' is a prose poem]. Though, according to the slip-cover of my edition, he was going to publish another novel (finally!) entitled 'The Rissala'. However, G.V. Desani recently died on 15th November 2000 in Austin, Texas, ill and reclusive. I do not know what happened to 'The Rissala'.

Despite only producing one actual novel, Desani knew he had written a classic in 'All About H. Hatterr'. Shoma Chaudhury reports that, though chronically skint, teaching at the School of Oriental & African Studies in London while living out of a dismal, one room basement flat in Chelsea (which had a loo on the distant end of a cold court-yard),
Desani once came to his friend Khushwant Singh, who was the Press attaché in the Indian High Commission at the time, and asked him: ‘Can you recommend me for the Nobel Prize?’
Khushwant was dumb struck: ‘But you've only written that one book!’
‘So?’ countered Desani softly. ‘Eliot's written very little also!’
‘Only Nobel winners can recommend others’, Khushwant protested weakly (taken aback by Desani's ‘total lack of modesty’.)
‘No, even the government can’, insisted Desani steadfastly.

Worn down by his persistence, and undone by his ingenuous self-belief, Khushwant meekly signed the forms. Nothing came of it of course. The Nobel committee in Sweden checked things with Dr Radhakrishnan, who was then the ambassador there, and also a nominee for the Nobel. He was not a bit amused and ticked Khushwant off roundly. Desani continued to live with his inconvenient loo across the courtyard until he decided to set off to study in the Orient [for more about Desani, goto: www.gvdesani.org].

Returning to the novel itself: each of the seven main chapters begins with an ‘instruction’ from one of the sages of India (one sage per chapter). For example, chapter I opens with the ‘instruction’:
------------------------------------------
‘”In the empire of a Maharaja,” expounded the Sage of Calcutta to the disciple, “there once lived a potter, his name Ali Bee, who was stratagem personified. He owned an exceedingly fluent parrot, called Ahmed…The moral of the tale, fool, is not the chamber-maid. A wise man…must master the craft of dispelling credible illusions…The moral is ‘Be suspicious!’”’ (pg. 39, 41)
------------------------------------------

Each ‘instruction’ from a sage is followed by a ‘presumption’
; on the part of Mr Hatterr:
--------------------------------------------
‘An international school of thought (minus a headmaster-elect) is antithesis.
"Antithesis" is my parlance for the fellers who always oppose. They hate mankind.
They maintain that human nature is rotten to the core!
I am often tempted to agree with the school, and join the classes of hate…’ (pg. 41)
--------------------------------------------

And each ‘presumption’ is followed by a ‘life-encounter’, which is the bulk of the chapter:
--------------------------------------------
‘The incidents take place in India.

I was exceedingly hard-up for cash: actually, in debt.

And, it is amazing, how, out in the Orient, the shortage of cash gets mixed up with females, somehow!

In this England, they say, if a feller is broke, females, as a matter of course, forsake.

Stands to reason.

Whereas, out in the East, they attach
themselves!

Damme, this is the Oriental scene for you!

Every feller I knew out East, whenever he was down and out, had to answer a literal habeas corpus call from the female side!

The member of the specie, who had a crush on me, was the dhobin: viz., my Indian washerwoman.

“Damme, Bannerji”, I confided in my pal, “I am in a hell of a trouble!….I loathe the very sight of her…a woman of her age ought to know better!”

“Does she suffer from a morbid fascination of the male-sex anatomy? Is she an Elephant?” [asked Bannerji]

“Kindly explain that interrogation, old feller. I have lived a sheltered life.”

“Well, Mr H. Hatterr,” said my pal, “as an Indian, and a Hindu student-gentleman, I am deeply attached to the ancient classics. According to the sages, all women can be summed up
and recognised under four species. In other words, the Lotus, the Art, the Sea-Shell, and the Elephant. These are the four sorts of Woman. The Lotus-woman is A1 vintage. She has a face as pleasing as the moon. She is lovely as a lily. She launches a thousand ships, as Mr Marlowe says…”’ (pg. 41-42)

Notes on William James (and the fringe)

In the course of persuing cogent characterizations of the dynamic continuum of dispositions (for shapes of consciousness), the alaya-vijnana, hypothesized by one tradition in scholastic Buddhism, I have tired of Freud and Jung, and their unconscious, as the choice for translational (or even philosophical) vehicles. The road from Freud, I think, leads no where interesting, where understanding of the structure of the mental is concerned for Buddhists. What must be thought through is the characterization of the sort of the content which makes up that to which the alaya can be said to take as its object--but it is nothing like objects we might say can be attended to in apperceptive acts. the alaya, for one, has an asamvidita alambana, that is, an indistinct, and non propositional grip: it is that of which one cannot say this is x, or this x is y. [according to sthiramati] i have been toying with the thought that the 'content' (or the occassion which provides for the shape this continuum has, qua mental, is something like husserl's horizon, or james' fringe).
Husserl's meditations on the unthematized life-world (with sediments), is a better candidate. Also, I have recently been cheered to hear Prof. Matthew Kapstein (in class) suggest James' 'fringe'. For this is something I have been considering, and it is also deeply connected to Husserl's own meditations.

For those interested, here are some reflections on James, with copious citations from the willy writer.

From Consciousness, by C.O. Evans & J. Fudjack
Addendum E - William James' Theory of Consciousness

They cite Jung's (C.G. Jung, On the nature of the psyche, translated by R.F.C. Hull, (Princeton:Princeton Univ. Press,1969), p.95) discussion of James, where he footnotes James' idea:

[ftn: James speaks also of a "transmarginal field" of consciousness and identifies it with the "subliminal consciousess" of F.W.H. Myers, one of the founders of the British Society for Psychical Research. Concerning the "field of consciousness" James says (Varieties of Religious Experience, p. 232): "The important fact which this 'field' formula commemorates is the indetermination of the margin. Inattentively realized as is the matter which the margin contains, it is nevertheless there, and helps both to guide our behaviour and to determine the next movement of our attention. It lies around us like a 'magnetic field' inside of which our center of energy turns like a compass needle as the present phase of consciousness alters into its successor. Our whole past store of memories floats beyond this margin, ready at a touch to come in; and the entire mass or residual powers, impulses, and knowledges that constitute our empirical self stretches continuously beyond it. So vaguely drawn are the outlines between what is actual and what is only potential at any moment of our conscious life, that it is always hard to say of certain mental elements whether we are conscious of them or not.]

We note that the margin of which James speaks in the above passage is defined as being that which though in consciousness is 'inattentively realized'. In constructing the attentive model we employ the term 'object of attention' and insist on discriminating between it and that which is in subsidiary awareness. We use this terminology in the attempt to emphasize the fact that consciousness is structured by attention-- that is, it becomes definitionally impossible to speak of attending to the margin, fringe, or field of consciousness as such.

We may also notice that in speaking of the matter in the margin as influencing the deployment of attention James has, in our terminology, discovered the contexting function of items in subsidiary awareness. This is further emphasized by the use of the term 'field of consciousness' which he likens to a magnetic field. The essential attribute of a magnetic field that is of interest in this context is the fact that it can best be described in systems terminology and characterized by a set of equations describing the mutual influence changes in parts of the field have on each other. So far, then, we have a picture of inattentively realized matter composing a field that influences the movement of attention.

We shall cite other passages from James indicating that 1) he conceived of feeling as the mode in which the fringe or field is experience by the subject, 2) he thought that what we feel at the fringe of consciousness are relationships that provide a schema which gives the object to which we are attending a meaning, 3) he conceived of consciousness in terms of a part-whole relationship and of attention as accentuating (or bringing into relief) some part of a whole in consciousness.

1) James distinguishes between a 'higher consciousness' about things and the 'mere inarticulate feeling of their presence'. In the following passage we notice James describing sensations which are not objects of attention, yet are more than 'Unconscious nerve- currents'. We notice that he speaks of 'having a feeling' of such sensations even when attention is engaged elsewhere.

Habits depend on sensations not attended to. We have called a, b, c, d, e, f, by the name of 'sensations' If sensations, they are sensations to which we are usually inattentive; but that they are more than unconscious nerve-currents seems certain, for they catch our attention if they go wrong. Schneider's account of these sensations deserves to be quoted. In the act of walking, he says, "even when our attention is entirely absorbed elsewhere, it is doubtful whether we could preserve equilibrium if no sensation of our body's attitude were there, and doubtful whether we should advance our leg if we had no sensation of its movement as executed, and not even a minimal feeling of impulses to set it down. Knitting appears altogether mechanical, and the knitter keeps up her knitting even while she reads or is engaged in lively talk. But if we ask her how this is possible, she will hardly reply that the knitting goes on of itself. She will rather say that she has a feeling of it, that she feels in her hands that she knits and how she must knit, and that therefore the movements of knitting are called forth and regulated by the sensations associated therewithal, even when the attention is called away..." Again: "When a pupil begins to play on the violin, to keep him from raising his right elbow in playing a book is place under his right armpit, which he is ordered to hold fast by keeping the upper arm tight against the body. The muscular feelings, and feelings of contact connected with the book, provoke an impulse to press it tight. But often it happens that the beginner, whose attention gets absorbed in the production of the notes, lets drop the book. Later, however, this never happens; the faintest sensations of contact suffice to awaken the impulse to keep it in its place, and the attention may be wholly absorbed by the notes and the fingering with the left hand. The simultaneous combination of movements is thus in the first instance conditioned by the facility with which in us, alongside of intellectual processes, processes of inattentive feeling may still go on. 140

In the following passage James describes the fringe of consciousness by identifying it with attitudes we have, attitudes that manifest themselves as feelings.

The object before the mind always has a 'fringe'. There are other unnamed modifications of consciousness just as important as the transitive states, and just as cognitive as they. Examples will show what I mean.

Suppose three successive persons say to us: "Wait !" "Hark!" "Look!" Our consciousness is thrown into three quite different attitudes of expectancy, although no definite object is before it in any one of the three cases. Probably no one will deny here the existence of a real conscious affection, a sense of the direction from which an impression is about to come, although no positive impression is yet there. Meanwhile we have no names for the psychoses in question but the names of hark, look, and wait.

Suppose we try to recall a forgotten name. The state of our consciousness is peculiar. There is a gap therein; but no mere gap. It is a gap that is intensely active. A sort of wraith of the name is in it, beckoning us in a given direction, making us at moments tingle with the sense of our closeness, and then letting us sink back without the longed-for term If wrong names are proposed to us, this singularly definite gap acts immediately so as to negate them. They do not fit into its mould. And the gap of one word does not feel like the gap of another, all empty of content as both might seem necessarily to be when described as gaps. When I vainly try to recall the name of Spalding, my consciousness is far removed from what it is when I vainly try to recall the name of Bowles. There are innumerable consciousnesses of want, no one of which taken in itself has a name, but all are different from each other. Such a feeling of want is toto coelo other than a want of feeling: it is an intense feeling. The rhythm of a lost word may be there without a sound to clothe it; or the evanescent sense of something which is the initial vowel or consonant may mock us fitfully, without growing more distinct. Every one must know the tantalizing effect of the blank rhythm of some forgotten verse, restlessly dancing in one's mind, striving to be filled out with words. 141

2) The following passage suggests that James thought the fringe to be best described as composed of feelings of relation rather than discrete feelings of unrelated objects. This suggests the notion of an underlying feeling state as a mode of experiencing the frame or context of the object attended to and the idea of attention relevating one term or object in the complex system of relations.

We see, then, that it makes little or no difference in what sort of mind-stuff, in what quality of imagery, our thinking goes on. The only images intrinsically important are the halting-places, the substantive conclusions, provisional or final, of the thought. Throughout all the rest of the stream, the feelings or relation are everything, and the terms related almost naught. These feelings or relation, these psychic overtones, halos, suffusions, or fringes about the terms, may be the same in very different systems of imagery. 142

We can see the following passage as getting at the idea that subsidiary awareness of context determines which possible objects are appropriate objects of attention and that such dispositions are experienced phenomenologically as a feeling about the 'proposed' object of attention.

In all our voluntary thinking there is some TOPIC or SUBJECT about which all the members of the thought revolve. Relation to this topic or interest is constantly felt to the fringe, and particularly the relation of harmony and discord, of furtherance or hindrance of the topic. Any thought the quality of whose fringe lets us feel ourselves "all right', may be considered a thought that furthers the topic. Provided we only feel its object to have a place in the scheme of relations in which the topic also lies, that is sufficient to make of it a relevant and appropriate portion of our train of idea....The most important element of these fringes is, I repeat, the mere feeling of harmony or discord, of a right or wrong direction in the thought. 143

James speaks of the thought of an object as "the thought of it- in-those-relations, a thought suffused with the consciousness of all that dim context" 144 indicating, as we surmised from the above passages, that the relations we are aware of in the fringe of consciousness are the ones that make up the context for an object of attention.

3) The following can be seen as describing consciousness as singling out some part of a whole as its object of attention.

Consciousness is always interested more in one part of its object than in another, and welcomes and rejects, or chooses, all the while it thinks.

The phenomena of selective attention and of deliberative will are of course patent examples of this choosing activity. But few of us are aware how incessantly it is at work in operations not ordinarily called by these names. Accentuation and Emphasis are present in every perception we have. We find it quite impossible to disperse our attention impartially over a number of impressions. ...But we do far more than emphasize things, and unite some, and keep others apart. We actually ignore most of the things before us. 145

And when we supplement this description with the following description of the part played by the fringe of things ignored or not attended to we discover that it is this fringe that imparts meaning to the object we do attend to.

The sense of our meaning is an entirely peculiar element of the thought. It is one of those evanescent and "transitive" facts of mind which introspection cannot turn round upon, and isolate and hold up for examination, as an entomologist passes round an insect on a pin. In the (somewhat clumsy) terminology I have used, it has to do with the "fringe" of the object, and is a "feeling of tendency", whose neutral counterpart is undoubtedly a lot of dawning and dying processes too faint and complex to be traced. 146

(It is interesting, in passing, to note that what James is saying in speaking about the 'evanescence' of meaning is that the fringe cannot be made itself an object of attention-- 'cannot be held up for examination'.) In the following passage we again have the idea that the fringe that surrounds an object of attention gives it its meaning. But we also have what we might call James' attempt to describe the spotlight model of consciousness and its inadequacies.

The traditional psychology talks like one who should say a river consists of nothing but pailsful, spoonsful, quarterpotsful, barrelsful, and other moulded forms of water. Even were the pails and the pots all actually standing in the stream, still between them the free water would continue to flow. It is just this free water of consciousness that psychologists resolutely overlook. Every definite image in the mind is steeped and dyed in the free water that flows round it. With it goes the sense of its relations, near and remote, the dying echo of whence it came to us, the dawning sense of whither it is to lead. The significance , the value, of the image is all in this halo or penumbra that surrounds and escorts it, -- or rather that is fused into one with it and has become bone of its bone and flesh of its flesh; leaving it, it is true, an image of the same thing it was before, but making it an image of that thing newly taken and freshly understood.

Let us call the consciousness of this halo of relations around the image by the name of the "psychic overtone" or "fringe". 147

In presenting the above passages from James which can be understood as outlining some of the major features of the attentive model we do not want to give the appearance that all James says is consistent with the impression created by these passages. In dealing more explicitly with the relationship obtaining between subsidiary awareness, feeling, context, system, and such considerations as the whole-part relation as it pertains to the structuring of consciousness, the attentive model departs from James' psychological understandings although it may be considered a refinement of his view. In articulating a distinction between feeling states, for instance, the groundwork has been laid for an alternative to his theory of emotions which incorporates his theory into a more complex understanding. The following passages will suffice to present his theory.

I now proceed to urge the vital point of my whole theory, which is this: If we fancy some strong emotion, and then try to abstract from our consciousness of it all the feelings of its bodily symptoms, we find we have nothing left behind, no "mind stuff" out of which the emotion can be constituted and that a cold and neutral state of intellectual perception is all that remains. 148

In like manner of grief: what would it be without its tears, its sobs, its suffocation of the heart, its pang in the breast bone? A feelingless cognition that certain circumstances are deplorable and nothing more. 149

The problem with these two passages is that James is totally unclear about whether we are dealing with references to the fringe of consciousness or with references to sensations singled out by attention. For instance, we may interpret his reference to 'all the feelings of its bodily symptoms' to be his way of specifying the content of the fringe of consciousness, and then his argument that to imagine away the fringe is to imagine away the emotion makes perfectly good sense. For according to the attentive model what makes an emotion an emotion is precisely its role as an underlying feeling state functioning outside the focus of attention.

If these references are not references to the fringe of consciousness and its contents then we may well ask why not? Why would James ignore the fringe when it came to a discussion of emotion and revert to a spotlight

-page 144-

model in which all reference to feeling and emotion is a reference to sets of items singled out by attention?

Nevertheless, the fact remains that he does seem to ignore the fringe at precisely the point of its most crucial applicability: namely, in connection with emotion. On the very same page on which he asked, What would grief be without its tears, etc.? James makes the following statement,

The more closely I scrutinize my states, the more persuaded I become that whatever "course" affections and passions I have are in very truth constituted by, and made up of, those bodily changes which we ordinarily call their expression or consequence... 150

There seems no way of interpreting this statement other than by saying that James is talking about bodily changes which can be singled out by attention (or noticed). What seems to clinch the argument for this interpretation is the consideration that the sort of bodily changes which James mentions as 'expressions' or 'consequences' are precisely the sort of changes which we notice while in that emotional state. Thus, it would be unlikely for a person to be grief-stricken and not notice that he was crying, or angry and not notice she was striking the table.

And so if we give this interpretation to James, the answer to his gedanken experiment in which he asked what would be left of an emotion if the object of attention (the tears) were taken away is that an underlying feeling state would be left over. With that answer we would refute James' answer that nothing would be left over. Yet it is important to realize that this answer does not take us outside James' theory of consciousness, since the answer comes from his theory in terms of an appeal to the fringe of consciousness. This takes us back to the superiority of the first interpretation where we can argue that what James meant to be saying was that there would be nothing left of the emotion if the underlying feeling state was missing. Surely, James deserves the benefit of the doubt.
NOTES
140. W. James, Psychology: briefer course (New York:Collier Books,1962), p.157.
back to text

141. Ibid., p.177.
back to text

142. Ibid., p.182.
back to text

143. Ibid., p.181.
back to text

144. Ibid., p.171.
back to text

145. Ibid., p.183.
back to text

146. Ibid., p.249.
back to text

147. Ibid., p.179.
back to text

148. Ibid., p.380.
back to text

149. Ibid., p.381.
back to text

150. Ibid.
back to text

Friday, May 2, 2008

Empson (and the ambiguous smile)




Who is Empson? This will tell you a lot:

"‘my pupils [in Japan] often ask me to explain about methodology, and I always tell them I have no idea what the word means’: you can only teach criticism by grappling with the demands of particular texts and contexts.”

World-minded literary critic. Inhabited language with grace and intelligence.

And why do I care? Because my manuscript “How to make a Buddha Smile’ is incomplete without a chapter on Empson’s interest in Buddha faces. It would simply be obscene not to have it.

The best place to begin, is Haffenden’s biography, where he recovers more material than we possessed. (Among the Mandarins). But there is, perhaps, more. The so-called lost book of Empson on the asymmetry in Buddha faces has purportedly been found.

“And there's more to come, with the recovery of a lost manuscript about Buddhist sculpture: the ‘little Buddha book’, as Empson calls it in a letter of 1949.”

So Kermode, reviewing volume 1 of the Haffenden biography:

…[I]n pursuit of a serious new interest he began to make notes for a study of the ambiguous faces of the Buddha, and even went to Korea to do more research on this. He came to know the subject thoroughly, and eventually got his ideas into a book, which was later, most unhappily, lost in London.

And in his review of the second volume of the biography:

From his Chinese days he retained the interest in Buddhism which had prompted his book on the faces of the Buddha, a work long said to be lost, but happily now recovered. No doubt the indefatigable Haffenden will soon be editing it.


I hope that this is in fact the case. Haffenden was far too busy, I suppose, or important, to bother with an email query from a lowly PhD candidate, and one studying what I study. Marginal my interest surely is, but no less an itch deserving of being scratched.
(The reception of Buddhism through the optic of art is simply incomplete without a consideration of this book--)


Empson travelled not only in Japan and China but also in Burma, Cambodia, Indo-China, India, and Ceylon to see and photograph statues for his work in progress, The Faces of Buddha. The typescript was lost by a friend, who left it in a London taxi after the Second World War. Haffenden has recovered from Empson's notes a page giving the theoretical basis (the face's fundamental ambiguity), but, as often with Empson, the substance would have been in the detail. How deeply he was drawn to Buddhism is shown by a wonderful account of an epiphanic moment hearing Buddhist song in a cave near Kweilin.



Included in (29. Haffenden, John. Introduction to The Royal Beasts and Other Works (21), 1986) is an account of Empson’s manuscript about this, Asymmetry in Buddha Faces, which he had worked on for more than a decade and finished in London at the end of the war, ‘decked out’ with photographs ‘gathered on his travels’, but that ‘unhappily, through no fault of his own and to his lasting disappointment’, was lost in London after he returned to China in 1946. In addition to correspondence with George Sansom (see D22), Arthur Waley (D26), and T. S. Eliot, Haffenden refers as well to unpublished materials that demonstrate that Empson spoke or corresponded with many others about his theory, including, in 1939, Langdon Warner, who had been Assistant Curator of Oriental Art at the Museum of Fine Arts in Boston from 1906 to 1913, and, in 1940 or 1941, Rabindranath Tagore. For a slightly different account of circumstances surrounding the disappearance of the manuscript, see 26a. =

Raine, Kathleen. ‘Extracts from Unpublished Memoirs’. Raine recalls moments from her friendship with Empson and mentions in passing his letters to her from Japan. She notes that as an undergraduate he was drawn to the ‘oriental gods’ at the British Museum, and that Arthur Waley (see D26) was often in attendance at his parties at Cambridge. Raine was as well one of the few who read the complete manuscript of Asymmetry in Buddha Faces (see 29), and recalls here a passage from that work, though recounts slightly different details about its loss than those noted in Haffenden. Reprinted, with minor revisions, in Raine’s The Land Unknown (New York.: Braziller, 1975).







6. ‘The Faces of Buddha’. Listener 15 (February 1936): 238-40. (by William Empson)

Some of a lost book-length manuscript about the ambiguity of Buddhist iconography (see Haffenden, 29) is prefigured in this short piece. The work does not trace the theoretical underpinnings of the lost work, but does include comment about the lack of a ‘merely racial’ influence in Buddhist iconography. This is a point Haffenden traces to Empson’s experience in Japan, for ‘having witnessed [there] in the early 1930s the effects of a fiercely misplaced nationalism, he became concerned to minimise the importance of national differences and to emphasise what different countries held in common through their religious myths and art, and through their mixtures of race’. A fuller outline of Empson’s theory of Buddhist iconography may be found in 21b3, and further Empson comment about Japanese racialist theories in 11.

I think this can be found in:

Sir W. Empson, “Faces of Buddha” in W. Empson and J. Haffenden, ed., Argufying: Essays in Literature and Culture, (Iowa City, 1987).

From ‘Asymmetry in Buddha Faces’. In the opening page of his lost book-length study (see 29) Empson outlines his theory that representations of the face of Buddha combine incompatible elements of ‘repose’ and ‘active power’ in a ‘startling and compelling’ unity, and demonstrates that much of the theory that occupied him for more than a decade was set in motion in Japan. European experts have not often addressed the subject of the ‘magnificent’ faces, Empson notes, but he ‘had a chance [while] in Japan’ ‘timidly’ to suggest his theory to Anesaki Masaharu (see BD33), expecting him ‘to treat it as a fad’. Instead, Anesaki accepted the idea ‘as something obvious and well known’, and told Empson to compare the masks of the nô stage for ‘historical evidence’, for there as in Buddhist iconography ‘the tradition of the craftsmen has not been lost’, and without question the faces ‘have been constructed to wear two expressions’.

4. To John Hayward, 7 March 1933. Empson’s letter written in Japan includes discussion of his passion for Buddhist images, which he calls ‘the only accessible art I find myself able to care about’.

5. To T. S. Eliot, July 1937. Concerns Empson’s manuscript about Buddhist effigies.


See also, for further biblio,



Pollott, R. The Poet's Response: William Empson and the Faces of Buddha (PN REVIEW, 2006, No. 167, pages 54-56, XL PUBLISHING SERVICES. Great Britain)

Further research materials:


Empson, William, 1906-. Papers: Guide.
Houghton Library, Harvard College Library

* (184) The Harvill press. 1 letter; 1955.
With copy of a 1955 letter to George Fraser concerning Empson's lost manuscript on Buddhist sculpture.
* (337) Phillip, Rodney. 2 letters; 1955.
Item 1 is fragment; both concern Empson's book on Buddha sculpture.
* (911) Asymmetry in Buddha faces. TS. with A.MS. revisions; [1937-1938 ?]. 1 folder.
Fragments of an essay or book (not The listener 1936 article); includes notes from Khmer observations and passages on Noh and Kabuki drama from a draft of Ballet of the Far East (published in The listener, 7 Jul 1937).
(1026) Two Buddhist sights [in Rangoon and Pegu]. TS. with A.MS. revisions; [ 193- ]. 1 folder.
* (1037) Journal No. 5. A.MS.; 1932. 1 item.
Notes on Buddha faces and India; with loose sheets with notes on dragon dances.

* (1038) Buddha notebook. A.MS.; [n.d.]. 1 item.
Notes on faces of Buddha statues in a museum.

* (1042) British Broadcasting Company journal. A.MS.; 1941. 1 item.
Includes notes from British Broadcasting Company classes, "Liars' school" journal entries, Buddha drawings.

* (1043) Journal. A.MS.; 1946. 1 item.
Reading notes on literature and criticism; comments on Communism and Socialism; includes drawings of Buddha faces.

(1071) Pocket notebook: topics include Milton, speed of flight, Buddhism, drawings of faces of Buddha. 1 item.
(1074) Pocket notebook: topics include diagrams of the Globe theatre, drawing of the face of Buddha. 1 item.
(1089) Pocket notebook: topics include Milton, Donne , Galileo , drawings of faces of Buddha. 1 item.
(1138) Notes on Buddhism. Loose sheet torn from a notebook, with notes on British Broadcasting Company broadcast times in China. 1 folder.
(1139) Notes on Shakespeare. Loose sheets; includes leaves from a printed book with notes on Hamlet and drawing of face of Buddha. 3 folders.


(These would be especially interesting, if the drawings were by Empson himself).


* H. Visual material gathered by Empson
o pfMS and bMS (1148) Photograph and postcard collection. 24 folders.
Collection of images ( photographs and postcards ) assembled as part of Empson's study of the faces of Buddha : primarily statues of Buddha in Japan, China, Korea, India, Cambodia, London, and Paris, including postcards, photographs provided by museums, possibly a few photographs by Empson and 1 negative ; also postcards and images of western art and of sites in Europe, England, and the Far East.
Folders 1-6 are bMS and folders 7-24 are pfMS.
o bMS (1149) Additional photographs. 1 folder.
Includes: photograph of a faculty/student group in Japan ; photograph of a seated Buddha in a garden, signed by Empson; photograph inscribed "Skiers' Paradise on Mt. Zao [item 2];" theatrical photograph [Lear? Waiting for Godot?], Newcastle ; mounted clipping of a Times 13 May 1961 photograph of a Colombian Indian annotated by Empson.
o MS (1150) Additional Buddha research material. 1 folder.
Brochures: Banteay-Srei, two sites in Japan , Handbook of the department of oriental art of the Art Institute of Chicago ( 1933 ), and Berkeley Galleries catalogue no. 15: Chinese Sculpture May-Apr 1946 .
o pfMS (1151) Faces of the Buddha: research photographs. 5 folders. Photographs of two statues altered by Empson to demonstrate the asymmetry of the faces. 1 folder.

MS and bMS (1195) [Compositions by others: offprints, copies of journals, and pamphlets, many with presentation inscriptions]. Print; [v.d.]. 51 folders.
Includes guide book to the Buddhist section of a [the Indian museum in Calcutta?]


At one point in The Structure of Complex Words, Empson remarked “ it would be convenient to have a simple rule by which corrupt language could be recognised”, adding with dispassionate aplomb, “However I do not think we can get it”. He never gave a rule, simple or otherwise, to distinguish the “corruption” of the doctrine of the Trinity from paradoxical utterances such as his own piercing description of the Buddha’s face as “at once blind and all-seeing”

Thursday, May 1, 2008

Autorickshaw - Phat Phati, Tuk Tuk, Tuctuc



one of the things you need to know, if you want 'for hire'.


call it progress. but either way:







take the indian autorickshaw challenge:

Monkey Business (Courtesy Ananya)


One might think that the decision reached by the Chinese Government to invalidate all reincarnations (modulo the subtleties of Tibetan Buddhist metaphysics, which requires us to nuance what reincarnation might entail without a subsisting principle of self-identity) not authorized through scrutiny of the right forms signed in triplicate a tad baroque. I think, however, that the people of Hindustan might just be able to respond with some legalese of their own.


(from the times of India):
DHANBAD: Lord Ram and Hanuman, it seems, will have to appear in court if notices issued in their names by a judge here "reach" them.

A district sub-judge gave the order on a petition over a dispute involving a temple at Dahaiya locality where Lord Ram and Lord Hanuman are worshiped.

The court staff even went to the temple to serve the notices but there was no one to receive them.

The temple, dedicated to Lord Ram and Lord Hanuman, was offered by the Raja of Jharia to the grandfather of Hindi writer Manmohan Pathak in 1922.

A villager, Puran Chandra Halder, who regularly held Durga puja adjacent to the temple, petitioned the Dhanbad district commissioner in 1987 to declare the temple a public property. The ruling went in his favour.

The Pathak family then approached the Patna High Court citing a survey settlement of 1922 and obtained a degree in their favour in 1990.

Following this, in 1993, Halder petitioned the district sub judge to declare the temple a public property and made Lord Ram and Lord Hanuman as parties in the case. The temple was declared public property by the sub judge's court in 2005.

In February 2007, the district and sessions judge referred the matter to additional district judge, fast track court which issued notice to Halder and Lord Ram and Lord Hanuman to appear before it.

Halder appeared on February 17, and summons were issued against the Gods. But the summons could not be served on them as there was no one to receive them, counsel for the Pathaks, P N Bhattacharjee said.

And from another source:

The gods have been asked to appear before the court on Tuesday, after the judge said that letters addressed to them had gone unanswered.

Ram and Hanuman are among the most popular Indian Hindu gods.

Judge Singh presides in a "fast track" court - designed to resolve disputes quickly - in the city of Dhanbad.

The dispute is now 20 years old and revolves around the ownership of a 1.4 acre plot of land housing two temples.

You failed to appear in the court despite notices sent by a peon and post
Judge Sunil Kumar Singh in letter to Lord Ram and Hanuman.

The deities of Ram and Hanuman, the monkey god, are worshipped at the two temples on the land.

Temple priest Manmohan Pathak claims the land belongs to him. Locals say it belongs to the two deities.

The two sides first went to court in 1987.

A few years ago, the dispute was settled in favour of the locals. Then Mr Pathak challenged the verdict in a fast track court.

Gift

Judge Singh sent out two notices to the deities, but they were returned as the addresses were found to be "incomplete".

The temple site at Dhanbad Local say the temple belongs to the gods Pic: Mahadeo Sen
This prompted him to put out adverts in local newspapers summoning the gods.

"You failed to appear in court despite notices sent by a peon and later through registered post. You are herby directed to appear before the court personally", Judge Singh's notice said.

The two Hindu gods have been summoned as the defence claimed that they were owners of the disputed land.

"Since the land has been donated to the gods, it is necessary to make them a party to the case," local lawyer Bijan Rawani said.

Mr Pathak said the land was given to his grandfather by a former local king."


Recall, if you please, that this is a fast track court. And keep in mind, that all necessary forms were mailed, copied, lost, re-ordered, the originals found, recopied, remailed, and lost, with scrupulous attention to form.


(ps: the picture of Hanuman, from a noted modern Indian painter (who shall not be named, as a test of one's candidacy for Modern Indian citizenship), has been party to monkey business of its own, the popularity of which, I hope to shamelessly exploit in this blog. But yes, the nude couple frolicking in vasanta-rasa like moods, quite shamelessly, are indeed Rama and Sita (in happier times) It is all quite enough to make any primate age).

Sub-Ball-Turn


(yes, a subaltern...as such)

To the OED, where all upstanding persons turn:

[ad. late L. subalternus (Boethius, in sense 1b): see SUB- III and ALTERN. Cf. F. subalterne (from 15th c.), It., Sp., Pg. subalterno.
Johnson 1755 has subaltern, which is now the prevailing stressing in England, and, for the logical sense, in U.S. The stressing su baltern first appears recorded in Bailey's (folio) Dict. of 1730.]

The verb is older:
[ad. med.L. subaltern re, f. subalternus (see prec.). Cf. OF. subalterner.]
trans. To subordinate. (c1400)



c1400 Pilgr. Sowle (Caxton) I. xxx. (1859) 34 Al other worldly lawes ben..subalterned to gods lawe.

But the noun form, is the one you probably want:


A. adj.
1. a. Succeeding in turn. Obs. rare.
1604 R. CAWDREY Table Alph., Subalterne, succeeding, following by course and order. 1698 FRYER Acc. E. India & P. 363 Therefore God framed the first Intelligence, and that mediating the first Heaven, and so in their subaltern order to the Tenth. 1762 MILLS Syst. Pract. Husb. I. 469 The main stem, advancing higher and higher, left behind the subaltern blossom of a lower joint.
b. Logic. subaltern genus (or species): a genus that is at the same time a species of a higher genus.
1654 Z. COKE Logick 21 Subaltern Genus is, that is successive and by turn, that is when it is genus of them contained under it, and species of that which is above it. 1692 RAY Disc. II. iv. (1732) 149 A distinct subaltern Genus. 1725 WATTS Logic I. iii. §3 This sort of universal Ideas, which may either be consider'd as a Genus, or a Species, is call'd Subaltern. 1826 WHATELY Logic I. ii. §5 (1827) 65 Iron-ore is a subaltern species or genus, being both the genus of magnet, and a species of mineral. 1864 BOWEN Logic iv. 72 The intermediate Concepts are the Subaltern Genera or Species.
2. Of inferior status, quality, or importance. a. Of a person or body of persons: Subordinate, inferior. Now rare.
1581 LAMBARDE Eiren. I. v. 26 From the King..ought to flow all auctoritie to the inferiour and subalterne Iustices. 1597 SKENE De Verb. Sign. s.v. Homagium, Sum are maist chiefe and principall, sik as the King... Uther over-lordes are inferiour and subalterne. 1598 DALLINGTON Meth. Trav. Q2b, To this Parliament, they appeale from all other subalterne Courts throughout the Realme. 1622 MALYNES Anc. Law-Merch. 472 The Iudges for terme of life, and officers subalterne changing from yeare to yeare. 1695 BLACKMORE Pr. Arth. VI. 681 Inferiour, subaltern Divinities. 1728 CHAMBERS Cycl. s.v., The Subaltern Persons in an Epic Poem. 1734 tr. Rollin's Anc. Hist. (1827) I. 127 All such subaltern actors as played between the acts. 1809 MALKIN Gil Blas VIII. xiii. (Rtldg.) 309 Some subaltern attendants about the king's person. 1814 SCOTT Wav. li, He had been long employed as a subaltern agent and spy by those in the confidence of the Chevalier. 1875 GLADSTONE Glean. (1879) VI. 189 A case in which the statute prescribed a major amount of observance, but the subaltern or executive authority was content with a minor amount.
Const. to. 1597 Extr. Aberd. Reg. (1848) II. 154 Na maister..(except of the sang school), bot sic as sal be subalterne to the maister of the grammer school. 1609 OVERBURY Observ. France (1626) 17 Then hath euery Towne and Fortresse particular Gouernours, which are not subalterne to that of the Prouince. 1699 BURNET 39 Art. i. 18 Others holding a vast number of Gods, either all equal or subaltern to one another. 1728 CHAMBERS Cycl. s.v., The Patriarchs..had several Wives..; but there were several subaltern to the principal Wife.
b. Hence, of rank, power, authority, action: Of or pertaining to a subordinate or inferior.
1581 MULCASTER Positions xxxv. (1888) 126 Where to much distraction is, and subalterne professions be made seuerall heads. 1601 J. WHEELER Treat. Comm. 25 A Deputie, and certaine discreet persons..who..haue subalterne power to exercise Merchants law. 1602 R. CAREW Cornwall 85b, Neither can the parish Constables well brooke the same, because it submitteth them to a subalterne commaund. 1726 SWIFT Gulliver IV. vi. 295 They have a subaltern court paid to them by persons of the best rank. 1817 LADY MORGAN France I. (1818) I. 18 Gallantly fighting his way through every subaltern degree of his profession. 1822 SCOTT Nigel x, Protect the poor against subaltern oppression. 1868 GLADSTONE Juv. Mundi xi. 416 Sometimes the sovereignty was local, or subaltern.
c. Of immaterial things. (In recent use U.S.)
1644 DIGBY Nat. Bodies xxiii. 204 Which [motion] when it is once in act, hath..many other subalterne motions ouer which it presideth. 1654 H. L'ESTRANGE Chas. I (1655) 196 The vanity of that Faith, which is founded upon causes subaltern. 1750 JOHNSON Rambler No. 72 2 You have shown yourself not ignorant of the value of those subaltern endowments. 1776 BURNEY Hist. Mus. (1789) I. i. 61 These modes had other subaltern modes that were dependent on them. 1839 HALLAM Lit. Eur. III. iv. §55 All causes of wealth, except those he has enumerated, Serra holds to be subaltern or temporary. 1866 WHIPPLE Char. & Char. Men 22 The power and working intelligence of the subaltern natures it uses. 1893 in J. H. Barrows World's Parl. Relig. I. 256 Not a subaltern science to dogmatic theology.
d. Of material things. Obs.
1733 tr. Winslow's Anat. (1756) I. 302 The Composition of the Fibres of this Muscle, and its division into several subaltern Muscles.
3. subaltern officer: an officer in the army of junior rank, i.e. below that of captain. Hence subaltern rank, etc.
1688 Lond. Gaz. No. 2396/3 Count Strozzi..was..Shot dead..and two or three Subalterne Officers wounded. 1702 Milit. Dict. (1704) s.v. Officer, Subaltern-Officers. The Lieutenant, Ensigns, and Cornets of Horse, Foot, and Dragoons, are so call'd. a1721 PRIOR Dial. Dead (1907) 208 Had not I equally my Captains, and Subaltern Officers? 1807 Med. Jrnl. XVII. 222 The cries of the soldier were heard by the subaltern officer. 1811 Regul. & Orders Army 248 The Subaltern Officers, Non-Commissioned Officers, and Men, are to be divided into Watches. 1859 W. COLLINS Q. of Hearts iv, Have you any ears left for small items of private intelligence from insignificant subaltern officers?
4. Of a vassal: Holding of one who is himself a vassal. Hence of a feu or right.
1681 STAIR Inst. Law Scot. I. xiii. 252 The Vassals of the King, who only might grant subaltern Infeftments of their Ward Lands. Ibid. xxi. 420 If the major part be not alienate, Subaltern Infeudations..infer not recognition, when these rights are disjunctim of parts of the Fee. Ibid. 424 Seing all other Rights fall in consequentiam, as was found in Subaltern-rights, in the said case. Ibid. 429 Omitted not only by the immediat Vassal, but by all subaltern Vassals. 1723 Bibl. Literaria No. vi. 17 Reliefs, Fines, Duties upon the several subaltern Manors. 1765-8 ERSKINE Inst. Law Scot. II. vii. §8 Subaltern infeftments soon recovered force after the statute of Robert which abolished them. 1838 W. BELL Dict. Law Scot. 88 Suppose A to hold of the Crown blench, and that he subfeus his lands to B, to be held in feu... A's right is termed a public one; B's a base or subaltern right.
5. Logic. Of a proposition: Particular, in relation to a universal of the same quality.
subaltern opposition: opposition between a universal and a particular of the same quality. (Cf. SUBALTERNANT, SUBALTERNATE.)
1656 tr. Hobbes' Elem. Philos. I. iii. 30 Subaltern, are Universal and Particular Propositions of the same Quality; as, Every Man is a Living Creature, Some Man is a Living Creature. 1725 WATTS Logic II. ii. §3 Both particular and universal Propositions which agree in Quality but not in Quantity are call'd Subaltern. 1860 ABP. THOMSON Laws Th. §84. 151 Subaltern opposition is between any pair of affirmative or negative judgments, when the one has fewer terms distributed, that is, taken entire, than the other. 1864 BOWEN Logic vi. 162, I can immediately infer the truth of its Subaltern Opposite.
B. n.
1. A person ( or thing) of inferior rank or status; a subordinate; occas. a subaltern genus; a subordinate character in a book.
1605 CAMDEN Rem. (1623) 4 When all Christianity in the Counsell of Constance was diuided into Nations, Anglicana Natio was one of the principall and no subalterne. a1619 M. FOTHERBY Atheom. II. iii. §3 (1622) 219 The subalternes, are both, in their diuers relations; Genera, to their inferiors; and Species, to their superiors. a1628 F. GREVIL Life of Sidney (1652) 14 They..both encourage, and shaddow the conspiracies of ambitious subalternes to their false endes. 1706 PHILLIPS (ed. Kersey), Subalterns, inferiour Judges, or Officers. 1765 H. WALPOLE Otranto (1886) 10 The art of the author is very observable in the conduct of the subalterns. 1787 C. SMITH Rom. Real Life II. 133 If the subalterns of the law once seize on the property. 1816 ‘QUIZ’ Grand Master I. 3 Passive obedience under wrongs, 'Tis thought, to subalterns belongs. 1860 EMERSON Cond. Life, Power Wks. (Bohn) II. 332 The geologist reports the surveys of his subalterns. 1885 ‘MRS. ALEXANDER’ At Bay v, The chef de la sûreté and his subaltern.
2. a. A subaltern officer in the army.
1690 Lond. Gaz. No. 2616/3 The Marquis de St. George,..with his Lieutenant-Colonel, Major, 10 Captains, and 25 Subalternes are arrived here. 1760 Caut. & Adv. Off. Army 77 A Subaltern will find it extremely difficult to live upon his Pay, and support the Appearance of a Gentleman. 1796 MORSE Amer. Geog. I. 431 The respective companies choose their captain, and subalterns. 1811 Gen. Regul. Army 37 No Officer shall be promoted to the Rank of Captain, until he has been Three Years a Subaltern. 1846 BROWNING Luria III. 4 How could subalterns like myself expect Leisure or leave to occupy the field?
attrib. 1898 ‘MERRIMAN’ Roden's Corner x, Major White had, in his subaltern days, been despatched from Gibraltar on a business quest into the interior of Spain.
b. subaltern's butter, the fruit of Persea gratissima = AVOCADO, called also midshipman's butter; subaltern's luncheon (see quot. 1904).
1829 MARRYAT Fr. Mildmay xviii, Abbogada pears (better known by the name of subaltern's butter). 1904 A. GRIFFITHS 50 Yrs. Public Serv. 50 The traditional ‘subaltern's luncheon’ ‘a glass of water and a pull at the waistbelt’.
3. Logic. A subaltern proposition.
1685 tr. Arnauld & Nicole's Logic II. ii. 169 If they differ in Quantity only, and agree in Quality, as A.I. and E.O. they are call'd Subalterns. 1816 Elements of Logic II. iii. 47 Propositions which differ only in quantity are called subalterns. 1826 WHATELY Logic II. ii. §3, 1st. the two universals (A and E) are called contraries to each other; 2d. the two particular, (I and O) subcontraries; 3rd. A and I, or E and O, subalterns; 4th. A and O, or E and I, contradictories. Ibid., Subalterns differ in quantity alone; Contraries, and also Subcontraries, in quality alone. 1870 JEVONS Elem. Logic ix. 78 Of subalterns, the particular is true if the universal be true.
Hence subalternhood, -ship, the status or period of service of a subaltern.
1857 Fraser's Mag. LVI. 172 The Indian officer has to serve a long subalternhood. 1861 Cornh. Mag. Jan. 74 James Outram soon obtained the grand reward of efficiency in regimental subalternship, the adjutancy of a corps.




For those interested in Colonial usage (and don’t deny it, this is usually what you are interested in), here we go, from the Hobson-Jobson:

Ld. Valentia, i. 398. (d)- [c. 1610.-- "These men are hired, whether Indians or Christians, and are called Naicles." -- Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 42.] 1787.-- "A Troop of Native Cavalry on the present Establishment consists of 1 European subaltern, 1 European sergeant, 1 Subidar, 3 Jemidars, 4 Havildars, 4 Naigues, 1 Trumpeter, 1 Farrier, and 68 Privates."-<-> Regns. for H. Co.'s Troops on the Coast of Coromandel, &c., 6. 1834.-- "... they went gallantly on till every one was shot down except the one
of a Company."-- Orme, iii. 610. c. 1785.-- "... the Subahdars or com- manding officers of the black troops."-<-> Carraccioli, L. of Clive, iii. 174. 1787.-- "A Troop of Native Cavalry on the present Establishment consists of 1 European Subaltern, 1 European Serjeant, 1 Subidar, 3 Jemadars, 4 Havildars, 4 Naiques (naik), 1 Trumpeter, 1 Farrier, and 68 Privates."-- Regns. for the Hon. Comp.'s Black Troops on the Coast ofCoromandel, &c., p. 6.

--note, European subaltern. I think they can speak. If only perhaps, European languages, which may be an index of deprivation. In some quarters.


Now the usage with which, you are probably familiar.

Antonio Gramsci describes the subaltern classes as those subordinated by hegemony excluded from any meaningful role in a regime of power. Gramsci himself has workers in mind, but the term has also been used to describe other groups who are excluded and do not have a position from which to speak--for example peasants women. Gramsci further notes that "the subaltern classes, by definition, are not unified and cannot unite until they are able to become a 'State'".

It just ain’t grammatically fit unless you have mouthfuls, like hegemony, or even better, power.
Hegemony: hegemony is the dominance of one group or class in society, achieved not through force but rather through the consent of other groups. Consent is achieved through the dominant group associating itself with moral and intellectual leadership in a society. In classical Gramscian terms, the state dominates through force (having the monopoly on legitimised violence) while hegemony is achieved through institutions which we would associate with "civil society."
More concretely, Gramsci first used the term as a euphemism or original covert usage for the proletariat in his “Notes on Italian History”, a six point project that appears in his Prison Notebooks (1973).

Do not ask me how do define the ‘proles’, or why a military usage should have proved particularly solvent for Gramsci. Unless it was to indicate its being in ‘the nature of things’, as hierarchy is in an armed force. Necessarily. But this is sheer speculation. I have better things to do than read (if you can call it that) Gramsci.

But if you want a sense of how it is used today (an usage not covered by the OED, in its infinite wisdom—for let us see if the usage merits inclusion as a distinctive and recognizably English idiom ‘for more than Boston or Princeton or Columbia Brahmins’, here is a sample:
As Ileana Rodriguez (2001:12) from the now dissolved Latin American Subaltern Group, puts it however:
“The term ’subaltern’ [should be] employed not because the critical intellectual wants to subalternize the masses but because s/he wants to point out how in the logic of hegemony and domination the popular democratic project becomes subordinated”.
The subaltern is not only a descriptive notion whereby, since the subaltern cannot speak, they need an advocate to speak on their behalf. As Spivak objected (”Intro” Selected Subaltern Studies) one of the main themes in subaltern theory is not passively accepting a condition of permanent subordination. It is also accepting “subaltern consciousness as emergent collective consciousness” (15); and this also requires “the strategic use of positivist essentialism in a scrupulously visible political project” (13). Therefore, inhabiting the condition of subalternity also means consciously reclaiming the political in order to bring about the conditions to step out from subalternity:
“Who the hell wants to protect subalternity? Only extremely reactionary, dubious anthropologistic museumizers. No activist wants to keep the subaltern in the space of difference . . . You don’t give the subaltern voice. You work for the bloody subaltern, you work against subalternity”. (Outside in the Teaching Machine, 1993: de Kock interview)
it is nice to see some attempt to use ‘subaltern’ as noun, adjective, verb (subalternize), and even abstractive—the notoriously overused ‘ity’ suffix.

Compare the new mints with old weathered coin. (‘subaltern’ used to be a verb, and looks to be more elegant with the simple preposition ‘to’, than ‘ize’). But this is mere pedantry no doubt. Never mind whether the subaltern can speak. It is whether those who speak of subalterns can speak. And where the editors, those engines of hegemony par excellance, have gone. Itis, after all, perilous to use a non-case language as it could decline like one.



(I should say, the last few paragraphs are indebted to: The notion of the Subaltern
By Imanol Galfarsoro • Oct 26th, 2007 • Category: Analysis & Commentary; and for the picture as well: it is titled: Arrival of New Subaltern, by Richard Caton Woodville, 1856-1927).